Operation Manual TT1800SY PDF

Operation Manual
Introduction I Precaution I Basic Operation
Fanuc CNC System
PUMA TT1500S/MS/SY
PUMA TT1800S/MS/SY
PUMA TT2000S/MS/SY
PUMA TT2500S/MS/SY
Doosan lnfracore
Machine Tools PTT1500PEF3038
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the DOOSAN lnfracore machine tool. We are proud to have you among our
DOOSAN lnfracore family of users.
Manuals contain concise information on the setup and operation of your machine tool. To make the
most of its outstanding performance over a long period, the machine must be properly installed, and
operating and maintenance procedures must be clearly understood and carefully followed.
This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to our
desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to change or
modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest DOOSAN lnfracore Technical I
Service center.
CONTENTS
Part 1 MAIN OPERATION PANEL ........... 1
1. Power switches ............................................................................... 1
1.1 Layout of power switches ....................................................................... 1
1.2 Operation of power switches .................................................................. 1
2. Main operation panel ...................................................................... 2
2.1 Layout of operation panel ...................................................................... 2
2.2 Operation panel switches ....................................................................... 5
2.3 Key selector switch .............................................................................. 25
2.4 Optional function switch ....................................................................... 26
2.5 Foot switch operation ........................................................................... 26
2.6 LED display .......................................................................................... 27
2.7 Other switches ..................................................................................... 29
Part 2 OPERATION ................................ 30

1. Power supply & break ................................................................... 30
1.1 Power supply ....................................................................................... 30
2. Emergency Stop & Machine Ready ............................................. 33
2.1 Emergency Stop .................................................................................. 33
2.2 Machine Ready .................................................................................... 35
3. Path selection ................................................................................ 36
4. Operation Mode selection ............................................................. 37
4.1 Operation Mode ................................................................................... 37
5. Axis feed operation ....................................................................... 40
5.1 Jog Traverse ........................................................................................ 41
5.2 Rapid traverse during jog traversing .................................................... 45
5.3 Handle feed ......................................................................................... 46
5.4 Manual REF. point return ..................................................................... 48
5.5 Automatic reference point return .......................................................... 57
5.6 Automatic axis feeding command ........................................................ 59
6. C-axis clamp .................................................................................. 62
6.1 C-axis operation ................................................................................... 62
6.2 Axis traverse and restrictions inC-axis clamp status ........................... 64
7. Spindle Composition and P-code Spindle Rotation Command 65
7.1 P-code Method Spindle Rotation Command ........................................ 66
7.2 P-CODE Method SPINDLE Rotation Stop ........................................... 66
8. Left Spindle Operation .................................................................. 67
8.1 Left Spindle Introduction and Rotation Direction .................................. 67
8.2 Left Spindle Rotation Condition ............................................................ 69
8.3 LEFT Spindle manual operation ........................................................... 71
8.4 Left spindle automatic operation .......................................................... 72
8.5 Left spindle override operation ............................................................. 74
8.6 LEFT spindle orientation ...................................................................... 75
8.7 Left spindle output changeover ............................................................ 76
9. Rev. spindle operation .................................................................. 78
9.1 Rev. spindle introduction and rotation direction ................................... 78
9.2 Rotation conditions of Rev. spindle ...................................................... 80
9.3 Rev. spindle manual operation ............................................................. 82
9.4 Rev. spindle automatic operation ......................................................... 84
9.5 Rev. spindle override operation ........................................................... 86
9.6 Rev. spindle orientation ....................................................................... 86
10. RIGHT spindle operation .............................................................. 87
10.1 RIGHT spindle introduction and rotation direction ................................ 87
10.2 RIGHT Spindle Rotation Condition ...................................................... 89
10.3 RIGHT Spindle manual operation ........................................................ 91
10.4 RIGHT spindle automatic operation ..................................................... 92
10.5 RIGHT spindle override operation ........................................................ 94
10.6 RIGHT spindle orientation .................................................................... 95
10.7 Right spindle output changeover .......................................................... 96
11. Chucking operation ....................................................................... 98
11 .1 Chuck operation ................................................................................... 99
11.2 Restrictions in machine operation according to the status of chucking
101
11 .3 Chuck clamp/unclamp check ............................................................. 101
11 .4 Chuck clamp/unclamp operation ........................................................ 105
11.5 Dual chucking (option) ....................................................................... 107
11 .6 Chucking operation on spindle rotating .............................................. 109
11 .7 PMC alarm related to chucking .......................................................... 109
12. Tool post ...................................................................................... 110
12.1 The movement of tool post ................................................................ 110
12.2 The operation of tool post .................................................................. 111
12.3 Tool life management (option) ........................................................... 114
12.4 Alarm related to tool ........................................................................... 117
13. Coolant operation ........................................................................ 118
13.1 Connecting coolant motor and peripheral device ............................... 118
13.2 Standard coolant operation ................................................................ 119
13.3 Coolant flushing operation ................................................................. 122
13.4 Cool jet coolant operation .................................................................. 123
13.5 Mutual operation between standard coolant and cool jet coolant ...... 124
13.6 T.S.C (Through the spindle coolant) operation .................................. 125
13.7 Keep relay related to coolant ............................................................. 126
13.8 Alarm related to coolant ..................................................................... 126
14. Quick tool presetter {Option) ...................................................... 127
14.1 Automatic type quick tool presetter operation .................................... 128
14.2 Manual type quick tool presetter operation ........................................ 129
14.3 In case of using quick tool presetter by manual operation ................. 130
14.4 Keep relay and parameter related to quick tool presetter .................. 131
14.5 Alarm related to quick tool presetter .................................................. 131
15. Parts catcher(A) & conveyor {Option) ....................................... 132
15.1 Parts catcher(A) operation ................................................................. 133
15.2 Parts conveyor operation ................................................................... 133
15.3 Parts catcher(A) and conveyor operation ........................................... 134
15.4 Keep relay and parameter related to Parts catcher(A) and parts
conveyor ......................................................................................................... 135
15.5 Alarm related to Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor ........................... 135
16. Parts unloader(B) & conveyor {Option) ..................................... 136
16.1 Parts unloader(B) operation ............................................................... 137
16.2 Parts conveyor operation ................................................................... 138
16.3 Parts unloader(B) and conveyor operation ......................................... 139
16.4 Keep relay and parameter related to Parts unloader(B) and parts
conveyor ......................................................................................................... 140
16.5 Alarm related to Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor ..................... 140
17. Airblow ........................................................................................ 141
17.1 Air blow operation .............................................................................. 141
18. Signal tower & light {Option) ...................................................... 143
18.1 The machine status according to the light color of signal tower ......... 143
18.2 The machine status according to the light color of signal light ........... 143
18.3 Keep relay related to signal tower and light ....................................... 145
19. Parts count {Option) ................................................................... 146
19.1 Parts count function by means of NC function ................................... 146
19.2 Parts count function by attaching external counter ............................ 147
19.3 Alarm related to parts counter ............................................................ 148
20. Work ejector {Option) ................................................................. 149
20.1 Work ejector operation ....................................................................... 149
20.2 Work ejector movement ..................................................................... 150
20.3 Alarm related to work ejector ............................................................. 151
21. Auto power OFF {Option) ........................................................... 152
21.1 The sequence of auto power OFF ..................................................... 152
22. Auto door {Option) ...................................................................... 153
22.1 Auto door operation ........................................................................... 153
22.2 Alarm related to auto door .................................................................. 154
23. Chip conveyor {Option) .............................................................. 155
23.1 Chip conveyor operation .................................................................... 155
24. How to set the reference point of dogless machine ................ 157
24.1 Procedure on reference point setting ................................................. 157
24.2 Related parameter ............................................................................. 159
25. Torque control function .............................................................. 160
25.1 Block diagram for realization of torque control function by PMC axis
control 160
25.2 The function of turning center using torque control ............................ 160
25.3 Workpiece center supporting function using right spindle or Z2-axis.
(Variable torque command) ............................................................................ 161
25.4 Propulsion conversion table according to torque command value ..... 162
25.5 Cutoff confirmation function (Applied on MS, SY, S type machine) ... 163
26. Tool post interference check function ...................................... 164
26.1 How to set the tool post interference zone ......................................... 164
26.2 Tool post interference zone M-code ................................................... 164
27. C-axis composition control ........................................................ 165
27.1 Conditions and methods of composition control ................................ 165
27.2 M-code related to composition control ............................................... 165
27.3 Example program of composition control ........................................... 166
28. Periodic inspection function ...................................................... 168
29. Machine air-bag function ............................................................ 180
Part 3 PROGRAMMING ........................ 181

1. Automatic re-cycle start ............................................................. 181
1.1 Function description ........................................................................... 181
1.2 M-code ............................................................................................... 181
1.3 How to use (Sample program) ........................................................... 181
1.4 181
2. Rigid Tapping .............................................................................. 182
2.1 Function description ........................................................................... 182
2.2 Synchronous tapping command M-code & G-eode ........................... 182
2.3 Example of the rigid tapping ............................................................... 183
2.4 Cautions in the rigid tapping ............................................................... 183
2.5 Alarm & remedy related to the rigid tapping ....................................... 184
3. Workpiece transfer & synchronous control ............................. 185
3.1 Workpiece transfer introduction ......................................................... 185
3.2 Workpiece transferring method .......................................................... 186
3.3 Synchronous control & torque skip function ....................................... 187
3.4 Program example using synchronous control & torque skip function. 190
3.5 Alarm and remedy related to synchronous control and torque skip ... 193
4. Polygon turning function {option) ............................................. 194
4.1 Command method related to polygon turning .................................... 195
4.2 Example of polygon turning program ................................................. 195
4.3 Alarm & remedy related to polygon turning ........................................ 196
4.4 Restrictions in polygon turning mode ................................................. 196
Part 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........ 197

1. Program make & modify ............................................................. 197
1.1 Machining program modification ........................................................ 202
1.2 Registered program call ..................................................................... 203
2. Automatic operation run ............................................................ 204
3. Auxiliary functions in automatic operation .............................. 208
4. Automatic operation stop ........................................................... 217
Part 5 APPENDIX .................................. 219

1. M - CODE LIST PUMA TT series ............................................. 219
Part 1 MAIN OPERATION PANEL
1. Power switches
1.1 Layout of power switches
Main MCCB handle in

control panel
Located in the front of machine
Emergency stop Switch
ON I
Turn on the power according to power ON

D OFF O
CNC control power ON switch
procedure after being fully understood the

safety precautions for power ON.
D CNC control power OFF switch
1.2 Operation of power switches

This switch is for supplying the main power of turning center, it is
possible to turn ON/OFF the main power by MCCB handle attached to
the door of control panel.
MCCB used in machine has been selected by the power capacity for
each models of turning center. Regarding the power capacity for each
models of turning center, refer to the electric circuit diagram.
I&CAUTIONI
Be sure not to open the door under the state of ON, OFF and TRIP of MCCB.
Please turn on the main power after 2-3 second when the main power is turned off and on.
If not, 'ALP-CA' ALARM in turret motor drive is displayed.
MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 001

2. Main operation panel
2.1 Layout of operation panel
Devised by the company under the operation panel adopted a Membrane Switch, Doosan
lnfracore Machine Tools only. The operation panel is unique. Membrane switch to switch all
existing Discrete form of improved Push button, and all the action on the PCB is fixed.
No matter which type model, easy access to unified operation panel. I adopt the button on
the removable system, additional changes of options depending on the needs of the user is
easy. It has improved the operation of the application of the hotkey, visibility is excellent and
equipped with an LED to all function buttons.
..,.. Operation
panel
.... PCB
002 I Part 1
(1) MCCB handle description
MCCB handle description is as follows.
Switch
Description
position
If the door of control panel is closed and the handle position is ON

ON state, the power is supplied to the machine.
I Note) Compulsory force may break the handle if MCCB is not correctly
assembled with handle.
OFF
If the door of control panel is closed and the handle position is OFF
0 state, the power state of machine is cut off.
If the handle is in current position, MCCB performs the power

breaking function according to the following reasons.
1) Automatic power breaking due to over-current in the machine.
TRIP
2) Automatic power breaking according to Auto power ON/OFF
function (option). For supplying the power again under current
position, turn OFF the handle and then turn it ON.
This is lever for separating between the door of control panel and
MCCB.
RESET
When opening/closing the door of electric control cabinet under the
position ON of handle, turn to the reset position using screw driver.
(2) CNC Switch

ON I This switch is for power ON of CNC controller.
D OFF O
This switch is for power OFF of CNC controller.
In order to turn OFF the CNC power after operating the machine,
change the state to emergence stop by pressing the emergency stop
switch and then turn OFF the power.

(3) Emergency stop switch
Emergency stop switch is for stopping the machine immediately

when the machine has been an emergency state or damaged by
wrong operation. And it is also used before pressing the OFF
switch of CNC power in the machine.
When pressing the emergency stop switch, cut off the circuit that
controls axis feeding and spindle rotation, the machine stops as
soon as it pressed. And all the power of control valves is cut off
simultaneously.
When releasing the emergency stop state, return to the original
position by turning the emergency stop switch to the right direction,
then operate the machine by pressing Machine ready switch.
(4) RS-232C & Service plug receptacle

The service plug receptacle and D-SUB connector
0 0
0
[51 for interfacing RS-232C and external input/output
device are located on the right side of operation
panel in the machine. Some of CNC models are
equipped with 10-BASE-T Ethernet socket.
0
0 0
004 I Part 1
2.2 Operation panel switches
(1) Mode selection switch
00 rn
c:::::::::) c:::::::::) c:::::::::) ) Mode selection switch is the basic operating switch
c:::::::::) c:::::::::)
[!] I
c:::::::::) )
to select the operation type of turning center.
Each mode selection switch can be classified into 3

0
~
~~ kinds of operation according to the operation
REF JOG
characteristics
[Automatic Operation]
MEM mode, MDI mode, Tape mode
HANDLE AXIS SELECT
[Program Edit]
Edit mode
[HANDLE MODE]
[Manual Operating]
Handle mode, Jog mode, Reference point
return mode
Note)
When supplying the power at the first time, MDI mode will be selected automatically.
When pressing the Edit mode switches.
The machine will be changed to Edit mode.
?0 Edit mode can input the CNC program and save into
EDIT the memories. And it is also possible to modify I delete
[EDIT MODE] the program and load the program which is already
saved.
The functions related to the program edit determine

whether the program can be edited or not according to
the selection of Program Protection Key Switch.
For more details, refer to the program protection switch
description.
PROGRAM
PROTECT

When pressing the MEM mode switch, LED on switch is ON
and the machine will be changed to MEM mode.
MEM Mode can load the machining program which is saved
into memory and run the automatic operation of loaded
program. It is also possible to edit in back ground during MEM
operation.
[MEN MODE] Back Ground Edit is the function that edits another program on
display monitor during the automatic operation. For more
details, refer to the CNC Manual.
When pressing the MDI mode switch, LED on switch is ON and

the machine will be changed to MDI mode.
MDI Mode can input and execute a simple program. The
program made by MDI mode will be deleted on display monitor
after executing one cycle. And program under writing will be
[MDI MODE]
also deleted in spite of pressing the reset button on MDI panel.
MDI mode can input the parameter related to CNC and each kinds of
data.
When pressing the Reference Point Return Switch, LED on

switch is ON and the machine will be changed to Reference
Point Return mode.
0
REF
Reference point return mode can move each axis to the
machine reference point by manual operation.
[REF.MODE]
Note) When returning to Reference point of Y axis, be sure to

operate after fully understanding regarding chapter 2-
4(Reference Point Return of Y axis).
In case of turning center with Y axis, Y axis reference point
must be returned first, before X and Z axis reference point
return.
When pressing the Jog Mode Switch, LED on switch is ON and

the machine will be changed to jog mode.
Jog mode can operate the Jog feed of each axis.
During pressing the manual axis feed switch((4) refer to the
Jog feed switch) of each axis, each axis will be moved toward
[JOG MODE]
the selected direction and the speed which is set in Feedrate
switch
006 I Part 1
When pressing the Handle mode switch of each corresponding
HANDLE AXIS SELECT axis, LED on switch is ON and the handle mode of corre-
,.'~~~~,~
sponding axis will be selected.
= + If rotating MPG (Manual Pulse Generator) in Handle mode of
E i~QU}-
X1
selected axis, axis feed can be activated at the selected ratio of
the Incremental Feed.
[HANDLE MODE] Note)
A axis, C axis and Y axis are additional mode according to machine
type.
(2) Machine ready, Emergency stop release and Alarm release

It is the functional switch to release the emergency stop and to start up the initial
operation of the machine after turning on the power of the machine.
When pressing this switch under the state of being not activated
the emergency stop switch and electrical torque limiter, internal
LED is flickering under the basic condition for machine ready,
and if Servo Ready Signal in CNC is ON, then internal green
MACHINE
LED is ON.
READY
[MACHINE READY]
<Check the state of Machine Ready LED>
Machine Ready Relay is ON. (LED flickering)
Electric contactor of CNC power supply circuit is ON, and the power will be supplied to
PSM in CNC. When CNC becomes Servo Ready state, LED is ON.
When CNC becomes Servo Ready state normally, X axis brake will be released. (In
case ofY axis turning center, Y axis and X axis is also released simultaneously.)
Note)
Be sure to check whether the emergency stop switch is released or not before pressing
the machine ready switch. Without releasing the emergency stop switch, Machine ready
can not be done.

2) Alarm Reset & Emergency Stop Release Switch
There are some possibilities that the machine can be an
emergency stop state by electrical torque limiter due to the
increasing of load by the interference with workpiece or
mechanical interference during the axis jogging or automatic
operation of the machine.
In this case, in order to release the emergency stop state, press
the Machine Ready switch simultaneously during pressing the
emergency stop release switch. And when emergency stop state is
occurred owing to over travel of axis, press the Machine ready
switch simultaneously during pressing the emergency stop release
switch. It makes the machine to Machine Ready State and then
move the axis to the inside of travel stroke using feeding handle.
ALARM RESET
EMG.RELEASE Normally alarm reset can not be released by the above mentioned
operation of these switch until all of the alarm causes are
completely removed. In order to reset the alarm, be sure to remove
all of the alarm causes first. In case of occurring the problem about
the auto quick tool presetter, it can use for solving problem. Ax
pressing it, the drive of the auto quick tool presetter is reset and it
makes the state of the auto quick tool presetter to be good.
(3) Automatic operation & Feed hold switch

This is the switch that performs the automatic operation in MEM mode for CNC
program or holds the axis feed during automatic operation.
1) Cycle start switch
The available mode of cycle start is
MEM MDI
It can be used to start the automatic operation in MEM mode

regarding CNC machining program called by operator.
The called program will be run automatically as soon as
CYCLE START releasing the cycle start switch during pressing it under the
[CYCLE condition of satisfying for automatic operation.
START]
And this switch make it possible to the Reference point return of
each axis according to the setting of Keep Relay in reference point
return mode.
<LED state>
Light : in case of Automation Operation of CNC
Flicker : on the way to the Reference Point Return in Reference point return mode.
008 I Part 1
I &CAUTION I
Be careful that program will be activated to cycle start as soon as releasing this switch
during pressing it under the state of satisfying the condition for automatic operation.
Before cycle start, be sure to check the axis stroke etc. for preventing from unexpected
human accident and the machine damage.
In order to satisfy the condition for the automatic operation, refer to chapter 4-1 (the
condition for performing the automatic operation).

2) Cycle stop switch
This switch is used to hold the axis feed temporarily during
automatic operation.
When pressing this switch, the auxiliary functions(M, S, T) during
program execution will stop after its completion. And axis feed
and Dwell also stop.
CYCLE STOP At that time, the selection of Keep Relay determines whether
[CYCLE spindle and coolant stop or not.
STOP]
In order to release the hold state and restart automatic operation,
press cycle start switch once.
<LED state>
Light : In case that the automatic operation stops and the hold signal output comes out.
However, in case of hold during M,S, and T code execution, LED is ON and then
automatically OFF by the completion of motion.
(4) Path select switch

In order to select path1 or path2, then 3 different kinds of switches are provided.
Upper Path+ NC operation (path 1):
c=::J
U/L
Operate path1 & path2 together: , ~ss::Jil However, it is available in
I •I mode. If lhe mode isn'l MEM, U/L seleclion lamp will be flickering when the
state is lower & upper selection
Lower path + NC operation (path2):
010 I Part 1
(5) Jog feed switch
The following switches are provided for jog feed of axis in the machine.
c::::::::J c::::::::J
Jog feed switch of each axis is available only in ~ Will['!; mode.
~ Yc;G
According to the machine type, jog feed switches are as follows
1) Jog feed switch

CD Standard 4-axis machine ® Additional Rev Y-axis & C-axis machine
[!J [!J GJ
5] [§ [!J 5J [§ [!J
[!J 8J [!J
@ Rev functional machine ® Additional Rev and right spindle machine
@ Additional right spindle machine

B DB
@;] I·~· I [?;]
<Combination of jog switch on operating panel according to the turning center type>
PUMA TT-S Type :CD+®
PUMA TT-MS Type :CD+®
PUMA TT-SY Type : ~ + ®
In jog mode, jog feed switch can be used to the following manual axis operation.
(a) Jog feed operation of each axis
(b) Rapid traverse operation of each axis
(c) Reference point return operation of each axis in reference point mode

I illCAUTION I
In case of SY and MS type machine, be careful that the selection of linear axis (A xis)
and rotational axis(C1, C2 axis) will be selected with the combination of the selection
mode of Spindle selection switch as follows.
~ ~ ~
A-axis feed selec-

c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J
EJ D EJ
~ ~ ~
+~ ~+ ~§ ~
UPPER
tion of MS, SY
m;
0 LEFT T
type
c:::::::J c:::::::J
rr c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> )'
UPPER
~ GJ [i]
C1-axis feed selec-
tion of Ms, SY type m;
0 + ::::w
C1
+
c:::::::J c:::::::J
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> )'
+~ ~ GJ [i]
LOWER
C2-axis feed selec-
0:31 +
C2
tion of SY type :
I~ I
c:::::::J
C axis feed of M type is available only if the spindle se ection is in .
Turning center operation of basic axis(X,Y and Z axis) can be moved by Jog switch
after selecting upper or lower with regardless of spindle selection mode.
012 I Part 1
(6) Rapid & rapid override switch
Rapid override switch is for controlling the rapid speed.
c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J
available mode:
[EJ[I] ~ MDI
Rapid speed will be set in CNC parameter for every axis.

It is available for rapid moving using Jog switch in
manual operation or when selecting the Jog mode.
Operation is only available during pressing this button.
In case of FANUC18i, manual rapid speed at the 100%
of rapid override has been set to parameter (No. 1424 ).
3-step override can be selected by rapid select button on

the left figure.
RAPID OVERRIDE Regarding the related parameter, refer to CNC
( c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J
parameter manual.
[;] [[;] 100%
riiu
This rapid override switch can be selected individually.
Once pressing the button, LED is ON and corresponding
override is selected.
The selected feed maintains just before off state even
power ON after power OFF.
<LED state of rapid override switch>

c:::::::J
~
The setting speed in parameter(No. 1421) is FO in case
of FANUC 31 i NC under the state that the selection
switch of FO.
ILED of FO button is ONI
c:::::::J
25%
Rapid override is set to 25%.
ILED of 25% button is flickering!
c:::::::J
100%
Rapid override will be selected to 100%
ILED of 100% button is ON I

(7) Feedrate override
Using this switch, axis feed speed can be adjusted

between 0% and 200% at the amount of 10% except
the rapid traverse and handle feed in MDI, MEM and
40 160 Jog mode.
But this select function will be ignored at the thread
cutting or tapping operation.
0 200
Automatic operation can be changed by 10%
UPPER FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
feedrate(F) which is commanded in program to 100.
0 ::m CJIID 'WvY. If feed rate is set to 0%, axis feed is stopped and
80 v
alarm will be occurred.
As rotating upper turret or lower turret after selecting
40 180 upper unit or lower unit, This switch can be used to
change rotation speed. But this switch is controlable
between 0% and 100%. If this switch exceeds 100%,
0 200
LOWER FEEDRATE OVERRIDE It is fixed 100%
014 I Part 1
(8) Handle incremental feed & MPG
@) ~ INCREMENTAL FEED This switch & MPG are available in handle mode.
rn
I( c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J )
After selecting the handle axis by pressing the handle mode
X1 X100
switch of corresponding axis, select the incremental feed
~ ~
switch.
When pressing incremental feed switch X1 00, LED is ON and feed rate of corresponding
axis will be 0.1 mm selected.
When pressing incremental feed switch X10, LED is ON and feedrate of corresponding axis
will be 0.01mm.
X1 and X10, X100 switches will be alternative type that one is selected, LED is ON, but the
other LED is OFF.
The selected handle incremental feed maintains just before OFF state even power ON after
power OFF.
Incremental feed LED state of switch MPG

c=::J
X100 0.1 mm (metric unit)
X100 Switch ON
0.01 inch (Inch unit)
~
c=::J
X10 Switch ON
~
c=::J
X1 Switch ON
~
This is Manual Pulse Generator(MPG) to traverse axis you want after selecting Incremental
feed switch.
After selecting mode for axis feed, if MPG is rotated, the selected axis of handle mode
moves as the amount of constant step(0.1mm, 0.01mm, 0.001mm) according to the
selection of incremental feed switch.
I&CAUTIONI
For safe axis feed, be sure to check the interference between axis and device before
rotating the handle, then operate the axis.

(9) Spindle selection switch
It is the function switch to select left spindle in manual operation of the machine.
First of all, select upper or lower ~~

ll!..:J ~ -· un1t us1ng
switches,
select left spindle in enable mode of spindle selection switches as follows.
HANDLE AXIS SELECT
0
REF
Spindle rotation (FWD/REV), jog operation selection switch are available only if the left
spindle is set to speed control mode according to the selection of upper or lower unit.
When selecting the left spindle selection switch, the state of 1st
spindle in system 1 will be set to speed control mode.
LED is turned on after completion of selecting spindle.
[Left spindle
selction]
When selecting C1 selection switch, the state of left spindle will be

changed to Contouring control mode, the 2nd spindle (live tool) will
be set to speed control mode.
According to the type of turning center, it is available only for the
machine having the milling function.
If the milling tool has been set to speed control mode and the other
[C1
spindle have been changed to rotation axis (C1-axis), the LED is
Selection]
turned ON.
However, if the C1 is selected in composition control mode, the
spindle of another system is changed to rotation axis (C2-axis) and
after that, the LED is flickering.
When the current tool number of upper turret unit is between 13 and
24, the C 1 is not selected and alarm 2119 is displayed.
016 I Part 1
When selecting right spindle selection switch, the state of spindle will
be set to speed control mode. This switch is available only for the
machine that has right spindle.
[Right spindle LED is turned ON after completion of right spindle selection.
selection]
When selecting C2-axis selection switch, the state of right spindle

will be changed to Contouring control mode, the 2nd spindle (live
tool) will be set to speed control mode.
According to the type of turning center, it is available only for the
machine having the milling function.
If the milling tool has been set to speed control mode and the other
spindle have been changed to rotation axis (C2-axis), the LED is
turned ON.
[C2
However, if the C2 is selected in composition control mode, the
selection]
spindle of another system is changed to rotation axis (C1-axis) and
after that, the LED is flickering.
When the current tool number of lower turret unit is between 13 and
24(half station status), the C2 is not selected and alarm 2119 is dis-
played.

(1 0) Spindle control Switch
1) Spindle rotating direction selection & Jog switch
c=:::J
~
This switch is used to select the rotation direction of spindle.
Be sure to determine the rotation direction after selecting the spindle
[Spindle rotation selection switch in 2.2.9.
CW]
c=:::J
~
If looking to left spindle in back view, clockwise rotation direction is
FWD(forward). rotation. And in case of milling tool( the 2nd spindle),
also clockwise rotation direction is FWD. rotation. On the contrary,
[Spindle rotation
counter-clockwise rotation direction is REV(reverse). rotation.
CCW]
The setting method of the rotation direction of the right spindle is same with the setting
method of the rotation direction of the left spindle.
Spindle FWD. switch LED ON : indicates to select the FWD. rotation of the selected spindle.
Spindle FWD. switch LED flicker : indicates to select the spindle Jog.
Spindle REV. switch LED ON : indicates to select the REV. rotation of the selected spindle.
Spindle Jog switch LED ON : indicates to select the spindle Jog operation.
Using Jog switch of spindle, it is possible to operate Jog operation at 50 r.p.m. under
the following condition.
1. In case of opening the door without releasing the door interlock.

2. Keep Relay(KSPJOG) is set to 0 in automatic mode.
1) Sipndle jog switch
c:::::::J
ED When manual jog operation is selected, LED of FWD. rotation
:::oJJ switch is flickering, at this time, spindle will be rotated as long
JOG
as pressing the spindle rotation start switch.
[Spindle jog]
2) Spindle stop switch

This button is used to start and stop the spindle rotation.
In manual mode, select the spindle to rotate an select direction.
When pressing this switch, spindle will start to rotate, however,
in jog opreation, spindle can be rotated only as long as this
[Spindle rotation start]
switch is pressed.
018 I Part 1
3) Spindle stop switch
c=::J
~
In manual mode, press the spindle rotation stop switch for
stopping the rotating spindle.
[Spindle rotation stop]
Note)
It is impossible to rotate spindle by manual until S-code is commanded in automatic
mode after turning ON the CNC power first. Therefore, in order to rotate the spindle by
manual after CNC power ON first, command certain Sxxx of S-code in MDI mode.
(11) Spindle override switch

1) Left, Right spindle override switch
:::::t]lx c::m::> xlfC This switch is used to control the spindle speed.
80 v 120
When rotating spindle in automatic or manual mode, the
140
150
rotating speed can be adjusted by 10% step of
40 presetting value using this switch.

But, this switch is unavailable for thread cutting and
tapping operation.
0
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
(12) Tool index switch
Q TOOLNO. c:::::::::)
[~] ~ [E) [!]

This switch is used to command the rotation of tool index in manual
mode. When pressing this switch after selecting a number of tool
post by tool selection switch, the selected tool index will be rotated at
[Tool index] a one time.
Tool selection switch is for selecting a tool maually.

When pressing the II
increased one at a time.
@) I button, current tool No. will be
On the contrary, press II (~ I button, then curret tool No. will be

decresed by number 1.
[Tool selection]
After changging the number of curret tool no display, press the tool
index button, then tool index rotation will be executed.
0 TOOLNO.
If tool index is fixed correctly after completion of the rotation
I~
[Curret tool No.]
command, corresponding tool No. is displayed on ?-segments.
Current tool that completes the rotation command is displayed.
Note)
If the partition number of tool index and the selection of Keep Relay are not proper, tool
No. is not displayed correctly and alarm is occurred.
Note)
When C1 or C2 is selected at upper/ lower turret, if the current tool number is 12 and
upper/lower turret is doing FWD rotation, turret unit no longer rotates and alarm 2119 is
displayed as tool index switch is pressed.
When C1 or C2 is selected at upper/lower turret, if the current tool number is 1 and
upper/lower turret is doing REV(reverse) rotation, turret unit no longer rotaes and alarm
2119 is displayed as tool index switch is pressed.
020 I Part 1
(13) Coolant switch.
This switch is provided ON/OFF switch.
Coolant ON switch on operation panel can be activated
regardless of the machine mode.
When pressing the coolant ON switch in machine ready state,

LED on coolant ON switch is ON and the coolant pump of the
machine will be activated.
Working coolant pump will be stopped the following condition. Also
LED is OFF when coolant pump stops its working.
1) LED is ON by the coolant ON switch, press this switch one more time and LED is
OFF.
2) When the OFF command is executed by M-eade (M09) in MDI or MEM mode.
3) red LED on coolant OFF switch is ON by pressing the coolant OFF switch.
4) Keep Relay that turn OFF the coolant is set to 0 when opening the door.
If coolant ON is commanded by M-eade while the LED on coolant OFF switch is ON,
coolant pump will not work and the commanded M-eade can not complete. In this case,
there is a function to complete automatically by the setting of Keep Relay.
I&CAUTIONI
When coolant ON is commanded by M-eade, be sure to turn OFF the red LED on
coolant OFF switch for operating the coolant pump.
<Switch operation for high pressure coolant(option)>

If high pressure pump is installed with normal pump by the demand of customer, high
pressure coolant pump will be activated by another M-eade in automatic operation.
It depends on Keep Relay setting value whether coolant ON switch is available only to
normal coolant pump or available to normal and high pressure coolant pump in manual
mode.
However, if pressing the coolant OFF switch, it makes high pressure and normal
coolant pump stop simultaneously.

(14) Single block switch
When pressing the single block switch, LED is ON, which means to
work the function of single block. This switch is used to execute the
SINGLE program sequentially by one block step during automatic operation.
BLOCK
To continue the operation after finishing the single block, press Cycle
[SINGLE BLOCK]
start switch again.
I&CAUTIONI
According to the setting of parameter(SBM), single block operation can be selected the
single block stop or the CNC command stop after executing it in next block when custom
macro syntax is executed.
( 15) Optional stop, optional block skip switch
These switches are available in

c:::::::J
I ~ II ~
MEM
c:::::::J
MDI
I mode.
1) Optional Block Skip Switch

When pressing this switch, LED is ON, skips the block that begins
with "/" in automatic program and executes the next block
c:::::::J automatically.
If the block skip signal is ON before CNC reads the block including
:0
OPTIONAL
STOP
"/", corresponding block is ignored. But, if the block skip signal is ON
while CNC reads the block including "/", corresponding block is not
[OPTIONAL
skipped.
BLOCK SKIP]
To release the optional block skip state, press this switch again and
turn OFF the LED.
2) Optional stop switch

This switch is used to stop the program temporarily with M-
code(M01) during automatic operation. Press this switch, LED is
flickering. And if M01 is executed in automatic operation, LED on
switch is ON, the program will hold while program is maintaining its
automatic operation state.
OPTIONAL
BLOCKS KIP
In order to continue the operation, press the cycle start switch to restart
automatic operation. LED is flickering when program is restarted.
[OPTIONAL
To release the optional stop, press again this switch to stop the LED
STOP]
flickering.
022 I Part 1
(16) Dry run & program restart switch
1) Dry run switch
Dry run switch is available in automatic operation.
The machine will be operated by the dry run speed regardless of the
commanded speed in program.
When pressing this switch, LED is ON and the machine becomes the
±)~
DRY RUN dry run state. It is used to check the tool movement only without
workpiece. If the dry run signal is ON or is changed ON to OFF during
[DRY RUN]
axis feeding, the speed is decelerating to 0 and then accelerates as
much as the dry run speed to be set.
2) Program restart switch

If tool is damaged or machining is stopped due to some reasons such
as power failure or emergency etc. during the automatic operation, this
switch is used to restart the machining by assigning the sequence
number of block to be restarted and restart the machining from
corresponding block.
Turn ON this switch and search the sequence number to be restarted,
and then the display monitor will be changed into program restart.
From this state, press this switch again, make it turned OFF. And turn
PROGRAM ON the cycle start switch, the tool will be moved to the restart point at
RESTART
the speed of the dry run according to the axis order set by parameters,
[PROGRAM and then the machining will be executed continuously. LED will be ON
RESTART] until it is pressed again and turned OFF on the restart display mode.
And press this switch again and turn it OFF, then the LED is flickering
until the whole axes complete the feeding up to the restart position.
After this, if the continuous machining is resumed from the restart
position, the LED will be OFF automatically.
3) Program Repeat switch
In order to use Automatic restart operation (Auto Re-Cycle Start)

function, you push the butten and then must be at the top of the lamp is
turned on. Re-programming the automatic operation 3-1 for more details
please refer to the start .. In order to satisfy the condition for the
automatic operation, refer to chapter 3-1(the condition for performing the
[PROGRAM
automatic operation).
REPEAT]

I&CAUTIONI
If the program restart switch is turned ON, normal automatic operation may not start.
Single block, optional stop, optional block skip, dry run and program restart switch will
be flickering if only one unit is in ON state or in executing under the state of upper I
lower simultaneous selection. And upper and lower is the ON state, the lamp is turned
ON.
Press the above switches in the upper I lower simultaneous selection, then upper and
lower unit can be turned ON or OFF simultaneously.
(17)Work room light switch

c:::::::J
~ This switch is used to turn ON the light in the machine.

After power is supplied to CNC and system booting is completed, the
operation of this switch can turn ON/OFF the work room light.
[WORKROOM
LIGHT]
(18) Auto power off

Press Auto Power OFF switch, then the LED on switch will turn ON
and if completion of machining is confirmed, the machine power
turns OFF.In case of releasing auto power OFF by pressing the
switch one more time before completing machining, automatic
[AUTO POWER operation of the next workpiece will be continued normally. However,
OFF] if Auto Power OFF is in progress, auto power OFF cannot be
released.
024 I Part 1
2.3 Key selector switch
(1) Setting Mode switch
This switch is optional switch to define the matters related to the safety
according to the state of door. If the Setting Mode switch is OFF
position, the power supply of CNC power input will be cut off in the
state of door open and will be supplied the power in the state of the
door close. On the contrary, if the Setting Mode switch is ON position,
SETTING
MODE regardless of the state of door, the power of CNC power input will be
supplied and spindle and axis can be moved. Here, if the door is
opened, the machine can be operated only spindle rotation, jog feed
and handle feed in manual mode.
(2) Chucking mode selection switch

LEFT cHucK This switch is the key type switch to select the chucking mode of
MODE SELECT
a~O~
chuck such as Inward or Outward.
..,.--....., Additional key switch is provided for selecting the chucking mode
[0_] of right chuck in types of S, MS and SY.
RIGHT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
Since the operation of this switch determines the chucking
IDO~n
..,.--....., direction of chuck, be sure to check the workpiece when chucking
~
the workpiece for machining.
And never change this mode selection during chucking state.
(3) Program protect switch

This switch prevents the existing program from editting.
If the key switch setting is same as left figure, it is impossible to edit
and save, also impossible to reset the coordinate system, input by
MDI and input the parameters.
PROGRAM This switch is used to protect the existing CNC data.
PROTECT
I&CAUTIONI
If the Setting Mode switch is ON, it is impossible to operate the cycle start switch in
automatic mode.

2.4 Optional function switch
For the convenience of operator regarding the machine operation, there are various optional
function switches.
(1) Auto-door operation switch
This switch is used to open/close the door in front of turning center automatically.
Note) This switch can not be activated during the spindle rotation.
c=::J
Ufo When pressing this switch, auto door will be opened and close.
AUTO
DOOR
The last selected state is maintained when turning ON the power first. LED displays the
current state of the door.
(2) Automatic measure device (Q-setter) operation switch

This switch is used to up and down the arm of Q-setter.
c=::J
~U This switch is to swing up and down the arm of Q-setter.

QUICK
SETTER
Above switches are available to operate only if the spindle stops and the parts catcher
doesn't move forward.
2.5 Foot switch operation

(1) Left foot switch for chucking
Foot switch has been installed to fix the workpiece on left chuck.
Put a workpiece into the chuck, it will be fixed by stepping on the
foot switch once.
If the foot switch is stepped on again in the chucking state, it
becomes unchucking state.
This switch does not work during automatic operation, M31
command, spindle rotation and M-eade (M68, 69) command.
(2) Right foot switch for chucking

Foot switch has been installed to fix the workpiece on right
chuck.
Put a workpiece into the chuck, it will be fixed by stepping on the
foot switch once.
If the foot switch is stepped on again in the chucking state, it
becomes unchucking state.
This switch does not work during automatic operation, M131
command, spindle rotation and M-eade (M168, 169) command.
026 I Part 1
2.6 LED display
(1) Machine alarm LED
ON
indicates that the machine is in alarm state. It will be ON under CNC
ALARM
alarm, single block alarm and MIC alarm. In case of message alarm, it
c=:::J will be ON when the automatic operation is done.
[{] Flickering
c=:::J indicates that it will be flickering when opening the door under the
program restart state and the door interlock release state.
(2) MOO I M01 LED

ON
Indicates that the program on selected unit has been finished due to
the execution of MOO or M01 during the automatic operation. Or indicates
that upper and lower program is run and finished simultaneously by MOO
MOO/M01 or M01 when the UIL unit is selected.
c=:::J The LED is turned OFF automatically when the program is started by
Q) pressing automatic start switch or the mode is set to manual.
c=:::J Flickering
Indicates that, when UIL unit is selected, the program has been
finished by MOO or M01 on applying only one unit between upper and
lower unit.
(3) M02 I M30 LED
M02/M3C ON
c=::::) Indicate when the program has been completed due to the execution
~ of M02 or m03 during the auomatic operation.
c=::::)
(4) Lube LED

ON
LUB Indicates that lubricant of height is low
c=:::J
Flickering
l~•rl? I Indicates that lubricant of press is low

(5) Chucking LED
1) This LED is to confirm the chucking of left spindle.
ON
indicates that switch(option) to check the clamp state of chuck has
been worked completely, and it is not the emergency stop condition of
spindle due to the malfunction of sensors related to the chuck during
LEFT CHUCK
MODE SELECT the spindle rotation (Normal chucking completion).
Qlo~
~
Flickering
[0_] indicates that low pressure chucking state has been occurred under
the state of the chucking confirmation in case of equipped with dual
chucking(option), or abnormal condition for spindle has been occurred
due to the malfunction of sensors related to chuck during the spindle
rotation.
2) This LED is to confirm the chucking of right spindle(standard spec. of MS and SY

type)
ON
indicates that switch(option) to check the clamp state of right chuck
has been worked completely, and it is not the emergency stop
RIGHT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
condition of spindle due to the malfunction of sensors related to the
wOii[]J
..,--...., chuck during the spindle rotation (Normal chucking completion) .
[§] Flickering
indicates that abnormal condition for spindle has been occurred under
the state of the chucking confirmation due to the malfunction of
sensors related to chuck during the spindle rotation.
(6) High clamp LED of the rotating axis
C1-CLAMP
Indicates that high clamp motion of C1-axis in left spindle has been
~
c::::::J completed.
[Left Chuck]
C2-CLAMP
Indicates that high clamp motion of C2-axis in right spindle has been
~
c::::::J
completed.
[Right Chuck]
028 I Part 1
(7) 1st reference position LED
....----- 0 ----,
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X1 Z1 C1 Y
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A
ON ; Ref. Rtn of each axis is the 1st reference
Flickering : Ref.Rtn of each axies are the 2nd ,3'd ,4th reference
2. 7 Other switches
For more details related to other function switch(i.e ; interface with external device or
additional option), refer to the user guide of corresponding machine type and the function
manual attached.

Part 2 OPERATION
1. Power supply & break
1.1 Power supply
(1) Precautions in power ON
The machine will operate correctly with 200-220V power source. If the power source of
factory is 380-440V, separated transformer is required. Power should be supplied to
machine through this transformer.
Otherwise serious damage on the machine will occur. And wiring between machine and
transformer should be executed by whom have qualification.
A. Power source ; 380 - 440V B. Power source ; 200 -220V

POWER TRANSFORMER ~
I
I
i
I POWER SUPPLY i
POWER SUPPLY Ll 3/N/PE i
J/N/PE
;~o:b ~f' " !WI
i
i
r]B[] ...
-Thi11j"-HOV
1!~1~ ~~{~o:b :v " 21w j
L1 l.2 LJ PE i
Ll LL Ll PE I i
i i
c=c=i ~ i
_____ j t"'-21<N )'__.

----< ~- 2N
)--- ~-- ·- . . ____ j
----
-'NC01A -WCOOA
. . ,m,
-QI ~-
L
Ll LL L.:l PE
I>
- -
I> I)
![;;;--~
ll I
-Q2~-
"AA'A[.
. [ :> :> :>
- -
.,tt
~LOOO _j
Rl , Tl sHuN"TliiiP c~L
+E
PEIOO PEIOD
I 1L11L2 1LJ PEiD1 1L11LL1L3
y CONTROL BOX I CONTROL BOX
01 :Main NFB NF1 :Noise Filter (option) Shunt Trip (option)

02 :Additional NFB (option) TM11 : Power Transformer (option)
According to the type of machine and selected options, the specification and species of
electric device would be different. Regarding the capacity of each electric device with
the type of machine, refer to the electric circuit diagram. The axes of machine are fixed
by bracket in order to fix it during shipment. Before supplying power to machine,
remove the bracket which fixed axes of machine.
OPERATION I 001
And check power source of factory, and then supply power to the machine following
sequence listed below.
~ MCCB NFB (attached to the door of control power cabinet) "ON" ---> Supply main
power to machine
~ Press NC power ON switch (attached to right-upper side of operation panel) ---> Sup-
ply power to NC and LCD monitor.

~ Press Machine Ready switch (attached to left-upper side of operation panel) --->
Change the status of machine into operation ready status.
(2) Power ON
[Rotate MCCB handle]

Check the door of control power cabinet closed completely.
If not, close the door. Rotate MCCB handle attached to the
door of control power cabinet into ON direction, then main
power of machine is supplied. MCCB handle is shown in
left-side figure.
[The status of machine just after rotating MCCB handle]

Supplying power to machine by rotating MCCB handle
2 enables to operate cooling fan in control power cabinet. The

power isn't supplied to NC yet, the power is supplied to the
inside of control power cabinet.
[Supply power to NC and turn on the CRT]
CD Press the switch, shown in left-side figure, in operation
panel, then power is supplied to NC.
0 LCD monitor located on the operation panel displays initial
ON I booting screen.
3
D @After completing boot sequence correctly, LCD displays
general screen that shows machine coordinate etc. At this

time, power is supplied to the lubrication pump motor.
The machine is now emergency stop status, and in this sta-
tus, machine ready operation is possible.
@ Regarding the Machine Ready, refer to the "2 Emergency
Stop & Machine Ready".
OPERATION I 031
(3) Power break
Power break will be done in reverse order with power supply
[Make machine Emergency Stop]

Press Emergency Stop switch shown in left-side
figure, then stop the machine.
[Break power of NC]

OFF O Press switch for NC power break shown in left-side
D figure, then break the power of NC. If the switch is

pressed, LCD monitor will be power OFF and power
supply is cut off.
[Rotate MCCB handle]

Rotate MCCB handle, shown in left-side figure, into
3
the "OFF" direction, then main power of the machine
will be cut off.
(4) Ground connection

- Electric box external ground connection is used by ground terminal and it need to connect
following paragraph.
Under 400V : Max 100 Ohm connection
Over 400V : Max 10 Ohm connection
Ground cable must have a good strength
Conductor size of external ground cable must connect following table.
Conductor size of power supply Conductor size of ground cable

[S (mm2)] [S (mm2)]
s <;: 16 s
16 < s <;: 35 16
s > 35 S/2
032 I Part 2
2. Emergency Stop & Machine Ready
2.1 Emergency Stop
Emergency stop means that the machine stops instantly and cannot be operated correctly
until the machine becomes machine ready status by additional operation.
In case of emergency stop, the machine becomes status as follows.
- Spindle axes stop instantly and motor power break.
- In case of being vertical axis, brake operates in vertical axis.
- Hydraulic motor power break
- Power break of 3-phase motor except lubrication oil motor.
(Coolant Motor, Oil Mist Collector Motor, Oil Cooler etc.)
- Impossible solenoid operation because of solenoid coil power break.
(In some machine, solenoid coil power doesn't break in emergency stop status.)
- Turret rotating stops instantly and hydraulic pressure interception.
- All of the moving parts in machine, such as chuck, tail stock, Q-setter and Parts unloader
(B) etc., stop its operation.
- Impossible to select operation mode of machine and to edit machining program.
-Impossible to input/output some data using RS232C and memory card.
-Possible to input NC parameter using RS232C.
Using the switch in operation panel, it is possible to operate standard coolant in manual.
When the machine becomes emergency stop status, power is supplied to NC correctly and
it is possible to use 1OOV/220V outlet correctly. There are two cases that the machine
becomes emergency stop status as follows.
- In case of pressing emergency stop switch.
- In case that emergency stop alarm occurs.
OPERATION I 033
(1) In case of pressing Emergency Stop switch
In case of pressing emergency stop switch shown in left-side figure,
the machine becomes emergency stop status. Since this switch
maintains its pressed status, machine ready cannot be operated until
the status of switch is released by rotating the switch to the left.
Before breaking main power in order to off the power of machine, be
sure that the machine should become emergency stop status using
this switch.
I illCAUTION I
1. In case of air cylinder, when emergency stop switch is pressed, the air cylinder
doesn't stop its operation instantly. Since cylinder move to its maximum operation range,
attention needs to be paid.
2. In case of pressing emergency stop switch, hydraulic motor will stop. But according
to the setting of keep relay, hydraulic motor may do its operation.
(2) In case of Emergency Stop alarm occurring

According to the status abnormality of machine, when serious alarm occurs, the
machine becomes emergency stop status. Machine ready cannot be operated until the
cause of alarm is eliminated.
Regarding to alarms that make the machine emergency stop status, refer to the table
as follows.
There are some alarms that do not occur in some machine. Except the following alarms,
in case that the serious alarm occurs in NC, spindle and servo system, the machine
becomes emergency stop status.
Regarding to the detail remedy on alarms, refer to the "Maintenance".
Alarm
Content of Alarm
No ..
Emergency stop switch is pressed or emergency stop occurs because of
2001
axis limit detecting switch operation.
2003 Circuit breaker for power is tripped by overload.
2004 Breaker for hydraulic pump motor is tripped by overload.
2005 Hydraulic pressure falls under criteria.
2008 Alarm occurs in main psm ..
2009 Machine type setting by keep relay is wrong.
034 I Part 2
2.2 Machine Ready
After ON the machine power at the first time or emergency stop, machine ready should be
operated in order to use the machine correctly.
If machine ready is done, the machine becomes the status as follows.
- Power is supplied to spindle and servo system. And the machine can be movable by
operation.
- Brake of vertical axis is released.
- Power is supplied to hydraulic motor. And normal hydraulic pressure is supplied to the
machine.
-All kinds of the 3-phase motor can work by operation.
(Coolant motor, oil cooler, oil mist collector etc.)
- Power is supplied to solenoid coil correctly. And solenoid coil can work by operation.
-All kinds of moving part of machine can work by operation.
- It is possible to select operation mode of machine and to edit machining program.
-It is possible to inpuUoutput data using RS232C or memory card.
(Parameter can be input in emergency stop status)
That is, the machine can be used by operation as above-mentioned.
(1) Operating Machine Ready

If emergency stop switch is pressed, release that switch.
turn machine ready switch C.W shown in left-side figure, then
the lamp in switch is blink.
In order to be machine ready status, power starts to be supplied
correctly to each unit.
If the machine becomes machine ready status correctly, the
lamp in switch is ON.
In general, above operation will be completed in 5-6 seconds.
If the lamp in machine ready switch isn't ON and keep on
flickering, or is OFF after several seconds elapsed, it means
that emergency stop status isn't released by the alarm.
In this case, try to operate machine ready after releasing the
MACHINE alarm.
READY
OPERATION I 035
(2) Machine Ready in Emergency Stop status due to axis limit detection
When axis limit detecting switch is operated due to the out-of-range of machine axes,
the machine becomes emergency stop status. In this case, first the machine should be
made machine ready status and then move the axes into the limited range
If emergency stop switch is pressed, then release it.
Press machine ready switch with pressing "alarm reset and

emergency stop release" switch shown in left side figure. The
machine will become machine ready status.
ALARM RESET
EMG.RELEASE
After the lamp in machine ready switch is ON completely, move

axes that is out of range into the limited range using handle or
jog. In this case, keep on pressing "alarm reset and emergency
stop release" switch until the axes move into the limited range
MACHINE completely.
READY
3. Path selection
In order to operate the machine after the machine is set to machine ready state normally,
UPPER UNIT or LOWER UNIT must be selected beforehand. There are three kinds of
PATH selection mode as follows
Operation Switch Mode Classify
["UPPER UNIT SELECT" mode] Automatic

Select to execute the rotation command of left spindle,
Manual
upper turret and NC operation of system 1
["UPPER/LOWER UNIT SELECT" mode]

c=:::J Select to execute the UPPER and LOWER unit
U/L simultaneously by the program saved in NC.
~8~ However, the program can be executed in MEM Automatic
operation mode only. If not, the lamp of switch is

flickering.
036 I Part 2
["LOWER UNIT SELECT" mode]
c=::J
Select to execute the rotation command of right spindle, Automatic
~ lower turret and NC operation of system 2(include A- Manual

axis)
4. Operation Mode selection

In order to operate the machine after selecting UPPER/LOWER unit of machine, the opera-
tion mode of machine must be decided beforehand.
4.1 Operation Mode

There are various kinds of operation mode as follows. And according to the operation,
operation mode should be selected in advance.

c=::J
["EDIT" mode]
?:2 Select to modify, register and delete the Automatic
EDIT machining program.
c=::J Automatic
[£] M
["MEM" mode]
Select to execute program saved in NC.
["MDI" mode] Automatic

Select to command temporary automatic
c=::J
[!]
command or when operator input NC data
directly. In case of automatic operation,
I
operator must input automatic command into
NC directly.
c=::J Manual
00 c=::J
["REF. RTN" mode]
Select to execute reference point return.
Manual
[E) G
["JOG" mode]
Select to traverse axes using jog switch.
OPERATION I 037
HANDLE AXIS SELECT
=~
I~J ~~ @ A
[HANDLE mode]
Select to traverse axes using MPG by minute
unit.
Manual
Mode mentioned above is classified by two major mode such as automatic mode and
manual mode.
038 I Part 2
According to the automatic mode and manual mode, restrictions on machine operation hap-
pened.
Normally operation using manual operation switch in operation panel can be done in manual
mode only.
- Spindle rotate and stop operation using manual operation switch.
- Spindle select operation using manual operation switch.
- Turret rotate operation using manual operation switch.
-Auto door operation using manual operation switch.
- Q-setter Up/Down operation using manual operation switch.
However, some operation can be done regardless of selected mode, the operation is possi-
ble if automatic operation isn't progressing. More detail explanation, refer to the correspond-
ing operation manual.
-Chuck clamp/unclamp operation using manual operation switch.
If mode selection is completed correctly as below, will displayed in LCD

screen.
ACTUAL POSIT ION

N00000
SAMPLE PROGRAM)
MODAL
lillll liBIJ li1J. 1 F M
li9? li6? liSIJ. 1 H <FACE & OD TURN)
li69 li54 li49 D
li99 li64 li15 HD.T <D16 E/M POLYGON) ;
li21 li18 !illS. 5 5 NX.T
li41l li69.11i54.4
li25 li41l.11i81l.S
li22 liSIJ. 21i81l. 4
5 ll SLM ll
I&CAUTIONI
1. Operation Mode Change can be done only in machine ready status.
2. If emergency stop occurs in machine, mode switches to MDI mode. When machine ready
is operated, jog mode is selected automatically.
OPERATION I 039
5. Axis feed operation
Turning center consists of axes as shown above. According to the machine type, the consti-
tution of attached axes is shown as follows
Classi- SPINDLE AXIS

fication UPPER LOWER UPPER LOWER
TYPE LEFT ROT. LEFT ROT. X1 Z1 C1 A y X2 Z2 C2
TTS 0 X 0 X 0 0 X 0 X 0 0 X
TTMS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 0
TTSY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
040 I Part 2
5.1 Jog Traverse
Each axes can be traversed using jog traverse switch in operation panel.
(1) How to operate in jog traverse

c:::::::J
~
[U/L PATH selection]
Press the switch to select UPPER or LOWER UNIT as
shown in left side.
Select UPPER UNIT, then X1, Z1, C1 and Y-axis can be
c=::::)
LOWER
movable.
Select LOWER UNIT, then X2, Z2,C2 and A-axis can be
movable.
[Jog mode selection]

2 Press the switch shown in left side, then the machine is set
to be Jog mode.
1) X, Z-axis traverse
[Press X, Z jog switch assigned to the

direction, then the axis will traverse]
The axis will traverse while the corresponding
switch of direction and axis, that want to be
[!J ~ traversed, is pressed. The axis traverse will stop

when the switch is released.
~ X 1 +dir ~ X 1 -dir.
3
5] ~ 5J X 2 -dir X 2 +dir.
8J [!J [!J [!J

~z +dir. ~ z -dir.
-tz • -Z
OPERATION I 041
2) Y -axis traverse
[Press Y jog switch assigned to the direction, then

the axis will traverse]
The axis will traverse while the corresponding switch of
#+Y direction and axis, that want to be traversed, is pressed.
The axis traverse will stop when the switch is released.
3
!#-Y
~ Y axis +dir. ~ Y axis -dir.
II ~y I ~
II ~y I II ~y I
3) A-axis traverse
[Press A jog switch assigned to the direction, then

the axis will traverse]
The axis will traverse while the corresponding switch of
direction and axis, that want to be traversed, is pressed.
The axis traverse will stop when the switch is released.
A-axis can be moved in(-) direction only if X1 and x2 is
in reference point, and it can be moved in(+) direction
3 regardless of X1, X2 reference point.
A-axis jog switch is commonly used with C-axis jog
switch. And it can be used in A-axis switch only if Left or
Right spindle is selected.
~ A axis +dir. ~ A axis -dir.
4) C(C1 )-axis traverse
[C1-axis (Rev. spindle) selection]

After selecting Upper unit switch, press the
c:::::::J
=
switch shown in left side, then select C 1-axis
3 (Upper turret rev. spindle). According to the
C1
machine type(S-TYPE), this switch may be
absent. In this case, ignore this operating
instruction.
042 I Part 2
[C2-axis (Rotary spindle) selection]
After selecting Lower unit, press the switch
c=::::)
shown in left side, then C2-axis (Lower turret
3 eC2
rotary spindle) is selected. According to the
machine type (M-type), this switch may be
absent. In this case, ignore this operating
instruction.
[Press C jog switch assigned to the direction,

then the axis will rotate]
The axis will traverse while the corresponding
switch of direction and axis, that want to be tra-
versed, is pressed. The axis traverse will stop
B ~~
4 when the switch is released.
~C-axis + dir. ~C-axis- dir.

c==:::) c==:::)
[?;] ~
OPERATION I 043
(2) Jog feeding speed
0 200 0 200
UPPER FEEDRA1E OVERRIDE LOWER FEEDRA1E OVERRIDE
Feeding speed is decided by the status of feed override switch as shown in left side
figure. This switch is classified by Upper unit and Lower unit. When this switch is in
100%, the speed is set in NC parameter. And within the range of 0-200%, it is possible
to change by 10% as follows.
(Feedrate override switch for Upper unit) Unit(mm/min)

0% 30% 50% 100% 150% 200%
X1, Z1, Y-axis stop 300 500 1000 1500 2000
C1(C)-axis stop 216 360 720 1080 1440
(Feedrate override switch for Lower unit) Unit(mm/min)

0% 30% 50% 100% 150% 200%
X2, Z2,A-axis stop 300 500 1000 1500 2000
C2-axis stop 216 360 720 1080 1440
(3) Jog traverse limit

CD In case that front door of machine is open, axes are impossible to traverse
rapidly using jog switch.
® n case that Q-setter is down, Jog axis traverse is possible with front door open.
However, traverse speed is limited by 10mm/min. But in some machine, the axes
are adjusted not to traverse.
@ According to the condition of machining such as tapping, C-axis can be clamped.
In case that C-axis is clamped, C-axis traverse is limited.
044 I Part 2
5.2 Rapid traverse during jog traversing
Using the jog axis traverse switch and rapid traverse switch in operation panel, each axes
can be traversed in rapid.
(1) Operation method for jog rapid traverse

Press the switch shown in left side, then Upper or Lower
unit is selected for jog feeding.
When Upper unit is selected, X1, Z1, C1 andY-axis can be
fed.
LOWER
When Lower unit is selected, X2, Z2, C2 and A-axis can be
fed.
[Jog mode selection]

2 VVVv(D) Press the switch shown in left side, then the machine
rvv
JOG becomes jog mode.
[Axis traverse by pressing jog switch with rapid

traverse switch at the same time]
Decide the axis and direction that want to be traversed.
3 The axis will traverse in rapid while the corresponding
switch of jog and rapid traverse switch is pressed. The axis
will keep traversing at the speed set by the feed override
when rapid traverse switch is released.
(2) Jog rapid traverse speed

Operate switches as follows, rapid traverse speed can be adjusted with 3 levels.
Rapid traverse speed of F100%, FO% are set in Parameter, and under these criterion,
speed can be adjusted by 3 level.
In case of F100%, F25% means that the axis will traverse at the speed of 25%.
Whenever pressing the switch, the lamp in switch is ON or OFF. If the lamp in switch is ON,
it means that the speed is set. Rapid traverse speed is different according to the machine
type. Regarding to the exact speed, refer to the specification of machine.
RAPID OVERRIDE Select FO% The lamps of FO is ON
c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J
Select F25% The lamps of F25 is ON
[;] 25%
'lJlJ [;]u Select F100% The lamps of F100 is ON
(3) Jog rapid traverse limit

In case that Q-setter is down, rapid traverse using jog switch operation is restricted.
OPERATION I 045
5.3 Handle feed
Each axes can be traversed by minute step using MPG(Manual Pulse Generator).
(1) How to operate handle

Press the switch shown in left side, then Upper or
Lower unit is selected for jog feeding.
When Upper unit is selected, X1, Z1, C1 and Y-
axis can be fed.
When Lower unit is selected, X2, Z2,C2 and A-axis
can be fed.
[C1, C2 spindle selection]

In case that the machine has C(1 ), C2-axis, C-axis
should be selected by pressing the switch shown in
left side. If the machine has no C(1 ), C2-axis, it is
not necessary.
HANDLE AXIS SELECT
[Handle mode selection]

2 Press handle mode selection switch of axis that
want to be traversed.
[Traversing axis by rotating MPG in the

direction wanted]
As shown in left side figure, The axis will be
3 RS'
'il>
'·~ 2/:i
traversed in + direction by rotating MPG in +
direction, and traversed in - direction by rotating
MPG in - direction.
'1!> <:)
0 If the MPG is rotated by a division, the axis will be
traversed in the amount that is decided according
to the additional magnification adjusting switch.
046 I Part 2
(2) Handle feedrate adjusting
The amount of axis traverse, when the MPG is rotated by one division, is adjusted by
operation the switches shown below.
If each of switches is selected, the lamp in the switch is ON. If the switch is pressed one
more time, then the selection is released and the lamp is OFF.
X1 "only select 0.001(mm or inch) in
@ -,4 INCREMENTAL FEED magnification "X1 one division
lJ m~
I ( c:::=::J c:::=::J c:::=::J )
X10 only select 0.01 (mm or inch) in one
magnification "X10" division
X100 only select 0.1 (mm or inch) in one
magnification "X100" division
(3) Handle feed restrictions

Regardless of front door open, axis traverse isn't restricted in handle mode. But in some
machine, in case that the front door is open, the axis traverse by handle is restricted.
CD If the front door is open and Setting Mode is in "OFF" status,

handle feed is impossible in the machine having Setting Mode key.
~ If the front door is open, handle feed is not operated in all of the
machine.
@ C-axis can make the axis clamped according to the machining
SETTING
MODE condition such as tapping etc.
In case of C-axis high clamping, the traverse of C-axis is restricted.
OPERATION I 047
5.4 Manual REF. point return
(1) Abstract of reference point
Reference point is used for setting the coordinate system or for traversing to specific
position in order to change tools during machining. This reference point can be used
from the 1st reference point to 4th reference point but only 1st reference point and 2nd
reference point are standard function, the other can be usable when additional request
issued. The position of each reference points is set in parameter for each axis. The
returning to the reference point is operated at a time by automatic command, and espe-
cially the 1st reference point can be operated by manual.
The 1st reference CD Reference point return can be operated at a time manually
point and automatically.
~ At the first time to ON the machine power, once reference
point return in manual should be operated. By this, coordinate

system of machine will be set and automatic operation can be
operated normally. In case of not operating reference point return in
manual after power ON, automatic operation cannot be executed.
@ When the servo of machine is absolute type, the coordinate
system of machine is memorized in NC without power supply, the

machine can be operated correctly without executing reference
point return.
® When the return is completed, reference point return lamp in
operation panel will be ON.
The 2-4th CD Reference point return can be operated at a time

reference point automatically.
~ It mainly used for moving tool post to specific position in order
to change tools during machining.

@ When the return is completed, reference point return lamp in
operation panel will flicker.

® At the first time to ON the machine power, the 2-4th reference
point return can be possible after executing the 1st reference

point return in manual. However, when the servo of machine is
absolute type, the return can be executed without the 1st
reference point return.
048 I Part 2
(2) Direction of manual REF. point return
1) In manual reference point return, the reference point return is executed in the
direction of each axes reference point regardless of(+) and(-) direction.
(3) Method of manual REF. point return

1) In order to manual reference point return, the conditions below should be satisfied
before returning to the 1st reference point.
-Machine ready status.
- Not machine lock status.
- Q-setter should be up.
-Jog traverse of axis should be possible.
2) The 1st reference point manual return of all axes is the type of no dog. The axes
will return as follows.
- All axes will be returned to its reference point without dog. Using the absolute
position detecting encoder, the position that is shifted from the position with
reference point marking to coincide with the grid point of motor, is set to reference
point of each axis in coordinate system.
- When selecting reference point mode, the rapid feedrate is set to F50% and in this
time, the F25% switch will be flickering on operating panel.
3) There are 3 methods in the 1st reference point return as follows.
- In case of pressing +/-direction jog switch of each axis until reference point return
is completed.
- In case of pressing +/-direction jog switch of each axis once and releasing.
(Jog switch one touch type)
- In case of pressing cycle start switch once and releasing.
(Cycle start switch one touch type)
OPERATION I 049
1) Manual reference point return of X1, Z1, Y, X2 and Z2-axis
In case of the machine having Y-axis, be sure that Y-axis should complete the 1st
reference point return during manual reference point return of X1, Z1-axis.
In case of the machine that has no Y-axis, operation related to Y-axis is not
necessary.
[Selecting Ref. Pt. mode]

When the axis is returned to reference point, press
reference point return switch after checking whether
the interference or collision is occurred or not.

Lower unit is selected for jog feeding.
2 When Upper unit is selected, X1, Z1, C1 and Y-axis
can be fed.
When Lower unit is selected, X2, Z2, C2 and A-axis
can be fed.
CD In case of pressing +/- direction jog switch of each axis until reference point
return is completed.
I 0 I
[Ref. Rtn. of each axis]
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>c:::::::::> Above all, press "+Y" switch until "Y-axis
X1 Z1 C1 y
Ref. Rtn. lamp" is ON.
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A In case of the machine that has no Y-axis,
~
there is not necessary to operate Y-axis.
3
And then press jog switch of axis that
5] EI 5J want to be traversed
complete lamp is ON.
until Ref. Rtn.
The method of reference point return in
[!J X2, Z2-axis of Lower unit is same with

Upper unit.
050 I Part 2
® In case of pressing+ direction jog switch of each axis once and releasing.

Press + direction jog switch of axis that
want to be traversed, then the axis will
traverse until it completes its Ref. Rtn.
In this case, the lamp in cycle start
switch is flickering. If Ref. Rtn. is
completed, the lamp in cycle start switch
is OFF and Ref. Rtn. lamp of
1.------ 0 -----,1 corresponding axis is turned ON.

c::::::::> c::::::::> c::::::::> c::::::::> c::::::::> All of the axes that jog switch is pressed
X1 Z1 C1 Y
executes Ref. Rtn. and there are some
c::::::::> c::::::::> c::::::::> c::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A restriction as follows.
- Y-axis executes Ref. Rtn. by command
regardless of Ref. Rtn. of other axes.
3
- X-axis only executes Ref. Rtn. correctly
by command after Y-axis has completed
its Ref. Rtn.
- Z-axis only executes Ref. Rtn. correctly
by command after Y-axis and X-axis have
completed its Ref. Rtn.
- In case of commanding on 3 axes, accord-
ing to the sequence as mentioned above,
first Y-axis executes and completes Ref.
Rtn. and then X-axis completes. After that,
Z-axis executes Ref. Rtn.
In X2, Z2-axis of lower unit, the reference
point return can be done in same manner
mentioned above.
OPERATION I 051
® In case of pressing cycle start switch once and releasing
[Ref. Rtn. of each axes]

Press and release cycle start switch, then
the axes will execute traverse in
sequence until ref. Rtn. is completed. In
this case, the lamp in cycle start switch is
flickering.
I 0 I
If X1, Z1, and Y-axis have completed its
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> Ref. Rtn. and the Ref. Rtn. completion
X1 Z1 C1 y
lamp of each axes is turned ON, the lamp
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A in cycle start switch will be turned OFF.
~ <])
When the axis executes Ref. Rtn. by
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
cycle start switch, each axis start to
traverse and
sequence as follows.
complete Ref. Rtn. in
START]
3 Y-axis traverse ----> Y-axis Ref.Rtn.
completion ____, X1-axis traverse ____, X1-
axis detects Ref. Pt. dog ----> Z1-axis
traverse ____, Z1-axis Ref.Rtn. completion
In case of the machine that has no Y-axis,

it is not necessary to operate Y-axis.
Ref. Rtn. in lower unit is same with in

upper unit. When the axis executes Ref.
Rtn., each axis start to traverse and
I 0 I
complete Ref. Rtn. in sequence as
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X1 Z1 C1 y follows.
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A X2-axis traverse ----> X2-axis Ref.Rtn.
completion ____, Z2-axis traverse ____, Z2-
axis Ref.Rtn. completion.
052 I Part 2
2) Manual reference point return of A-axis
c=:::J [Select lower unit]

LOWER
1 Press the switch shown in left side to select lower unit
0:;rr for reference point return.
CD In case of pressing jog switch of A-axis until reference point return is completed.
I 0 I
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X1 Z1 C1 y
[Ref. Return of each axis]
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
2 X2 Z2 C2 A Above all, press jog switch of A-axis until
"A-axis Ref. Rtn. lamp" is turned ON.
5] 5]
® In case of pressing jog switch of A-axis once and releasing.
I 0 I Press and release jog switch of A-axis,

c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> then the axis will keep on traversing until
X1 Z1 C1 y
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> it completes its Ref. Rtn.
3 X2 Z2 C2 A
In this case, the lamp in cycle start switch
5] 5]
is flickering. If Ref. Rtn. is completed, the
lamp in cycle start switch is OFF and
Ref. Rtn. lamp of A-axis is turned ON.
OPERATION I 053
@ In case of pressing cycle start switch once and releasing.
3 [Ref. Rtn. of each axis]
1.------ 0 ----,1
Press and release cycle start switch,
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> then A-axis will start to traverse for Ref.
X1 Z1 C1 Y Rtn. and X, Y and Z-axis will start to
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X2 Z2 C2 A traverse for Ref. Rtn. in sequence.
~ <]) In this case, the lamp in cycle start switch
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
is flickering.
If all of the axes have completed its Ref.
Rtn., the Ref. Rtn. completion lamp of
START] each axes is ON, the lamp in cycle start
switch is turned OFF.
3) Manual reference point return of C(C1 ), C2-axis

C1 (C)-axis and C2-axis can execute manual Ref. Rtn. independently regardless of
other axes.
c:::::::J
~
[U/L UNIT selection]
Press the switch shown in left side, then Upper or Lower unit
1 is selected for reference point return.
c=:::J
When Upper unit is selected, C1-axis reference point return.
LOWER
When Lower unit is selected, C2-axis reference point return.
0:rr
[Selecting Ref. Pt. mode]
c:::::::J
2
[I] When the axis is returned to reference point, press reference
point return switch after checking whether the interference or
collision is occurred or not.
054 I Part 2
CD In case of pressing jog switch of C-axis once and releasing
(Jog switches one touch type).
c=:::) Press + direction jog switch, then the axis will keep on
~
traversing until it completes its Ref. Rtn, even if the jog
switch is released.
3 c=:::)
In this case, the lamp in cycle start switch is flickering. If
~ Ref. Rtn. is completed, the lamp in cycle start switch is

turned OFF and Ref. Rtn. lamp of C-axis is turned ON.
® In case of pressing cycle start switch once and releasing

(Cycle start switch one touch type).

Press and release cycle start switch, then
1.------ 0 ----,1 the axis will start to traverse for Ref. Rtn. and
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::>
X1 Z1 C1 Y X, Y and Z-axis will start to traverse for Ref.
c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> c:::::::::> Rtn. in sequence. However, the ref. rtn.
X2 Z2 C2 A
cannot be executed when C-axis is selected.
3 ~ <]>
In this case, the lamp in cycle start switch is
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
flickering.
If all of the axes have completed its Ref.
Rtn., the Ref. Rtn. completion lamp of each
START]
axis is turned ON, the lamp in cycle start
switch is turned OFF.
OPERATION I 055
I &CAUTION I
1. If the 1st Ref. Rtn. is executed in manual, the axis will be traversed rapidly until it detects
dog. Thus it needs to pay attention.
And rapid traverse speed on Ref. Rtn. is restricted by 50% except that manual rapid
traverse speed is set to the value less than machine specification.
2. Ref. Rtn. cannot be executed in the status of machine as follows.
- Machine is in emergency stop status.
- Machine lock status.
- Q-setter is down.
- Machine mode is not Ref. Pt. mode but another mode.
- Jog traverse of axis is impossible.
3. When manual Ref. Rtn. is executed by one touch type, generally both of axes start to
execute Ref. Rtn. But during Ref. Rtn., in order to avoid interference caused by complexity
of machine, one of axes will execute Ref. Rtn. in advance.
-General PUMA IT series : X-axis returns and then Z-axis returns.
- General PUMA IV series : Z-axis returns and then X-axis returns.
4. In order to stop Ref. Rtn. by one touch type, execute the operation as follows.
- Press emergency stop switch
- Press feed hold switch
-Change the machine mode into another mode but Ref. Pt. mode.
-Press- direction jog traverse switch that want to be traversed.
- Press "NC RESET" switch in MDI panel.
-Change axis feedrate override switch into 0%.
5. C-axis can be clamped not to execute axis traversing in order to execute machining such
as tapping etc. In this case, if C-axis is clamped, Ref. Rtn. of C-axis is impossible.
6. Manual Ref. Rtn. method is set to one touch operation method by jog switch when
shipping. In order to modify this method, keep relay value should be changed.
K0.3 (KAZRN),K1.4 (KSTREF)
7. For automatic operation after the first power supply, manual Ref.Rtn about C1 ana C2
axis must be executed. If Ref.Rtn is not completed and automatic operation is executed,
alarm 2114 is displayed.
056 I Part 2
5.5 Automatic reference point return
(1) Automatic Ref. point return
Only the 1st Ref. Rtn is possible to execute in manual. The 1st-4th Ref. Rtn. are
possible to execute in automatic return.
(2) Condition of automatic Ref. point return

Automatic Ref. Rtn. can be executed in the status of machine as follows.
-Check the machine is possible to execute automatic operation.
-The command is possible to execute regardless of current axis position, but in case of
commanding to both of axes, the axes start to traverse simultaneously. Thus check
whether the interference is occurred or not.
- At the first time to ON the machine power, once reference point return in manual
should be operated. By this, automatic ref. return can be executed normally. However,
if the servo is absolute type, there is no need to execute manual 1st reference point
return whenever the power supplies to machine.
(3) Speed on automatic Ref. point return

The axis will traverse rapidly on automatic reference point return. In this case, speed
isn't restricted and can be adjusted by 3 steps using rapid traverse change switch from
0% to 100%.
(4) The status of Ref. point lamp when completing Ref. Rtn.
When the 1st Ref. point return is completed, the lamp of axis that completes its Ref.
return is ON.
When the 2nd-3rd Ref. point return is completed, the lamp of axis that completes its
Ref. return is flickering.
OPERATION I 057
(5) In case of automatic commanding, the axes will execute Ref. Rtn. automatically.
IP assigns the axis want to be return to ref.

G281P ; 1st Ref. return UPPER UNIT LOWER UNIT
G30 P2 IP ;2nd Ref. return X1 UO(XO) X2 UO(XO)
G30 P2 IP ;3rd Ref. return Z1 WO(ZO) Z2 WO(ZO)
G30 P2 IP ;4th Ref. return C1 HO C2 HO
y VO(YO) A AO
CD If G code system is A, use XO, ZO, YO instead of UO, WO, VO. Regarding the G code
system, refer to "FANUC OPERATOR'S MANUAL".

C2) "P2" can be omitted. In case that only "G30" is commanded without P2, the 2nd Ref.
Rtn. will be executed.

® The axis that can command automatic Ref. Rtn. in the same block will be restricted as follows.
- The axis that can command in the same block : X, Z
-The axis that cannot command in the same block: Y, A, C1, C2
058 I Part 2
5.6 Automatic axis feeding command
Automatic feeding command of axis can be done by G-eode command generally.
Regarding more detail explanation, refer to "FANUC OPERATOR'S MANUAL".
The most fundamental facts will be explained in this chapter.
Basically the status of machine should be in normal status that can operate automatic
operation in order that following commands shall be possible.
(1) Command method

CD Absolute command
Assign coordinates that was decided by coordinate system, and then feed axis.
The name of axis that can be used on commanding is as follows. The figure shown
below is actual example of commanding.
In case of rapid feeding from A point to B point---> GOO X30.0 Z70.0 ;
<The name of axis on commanding>
B UPPER UNIT LOWER UNIT

X1-axis X_._ X2-axis X_._
030 Z1-axis Z_._ Z2-axis z- -

C(1 )-axis c- - C2-axis c- -
70
z Y-axis Y_._ A-axis A_._
110
0 Incremental command
This is the method to assign direction and distance to feed in current position.
The name of axis that can be used on commanding is as follows. The figure shown
below is actual example of commanding.
In case of rapid feeding from A point to B point --->GOO U -30.0 W -40.0;
<The name of axis on commanding>
UPPER UNIT LOWER UNIT

X1-axis u- - X2-axis u- -
Z1-axis W_._ Z2-axis W_._
030
C(1 )-axis H- - C2-axis H- -
z Y-axis V_._ A-axis
110
ome of axes cannot use incremental command due to no axis name that is used in
incremental command. Especially, incremental command of X, Y and Z-axis cannot be
used in G-eode system A.
(2) G01 feeding command (cutting feed)
G01 is used in cutting feed.
OPERATION I 059
Command axis that want to be fed, position and feedrate accompany with G01 as fol-
lows.
~IG_o_1_1_P_F~_-__;______~Iw IP IP assigns feeding axis and its position.
UPPER UNIT LOWER UNIT

<Command Example> X1-axis X_._ u- - X2-axis X_._ u- -
Absolute command Z1-axis Z_._ W_._ Z2-axis z- - W_._
G01 X20.0 Z20.0 F10 C(1 )-axis c- - H- - C2-axis c- - H- -
Incremental command
Y-axis Y_._ V_._ A-axis A_._
G01 U20.0 W20.0 F1 0
0 F F commands feedrate.
The unit of feed rate is set by G98, G99.
Feedrate is changeable according to the status of

feed rate override switch as shown in left side. If the
UPPER FEEDRA1E OVERRIDE
switch is in 100%, the axis will be fed at commanded
0 :m CJIID ANY%
80 v 120 feed automatically. And with this basis, feedrate can be
changeable to 0-200% by 10%. When C-axis is in
180 high clamp, axis feeding is impossible.
0
LOWER FEEDRA1E OVERRIDE
(3) G98, G99 command (decide the unit offeedrate)

G98, G99, as like G01, assign the unit of feedrate in case that the axis executes feed
traverse.
1) G98 (feed per minute)
It changes the feed traversing of axis into 'feed per minute'. Axis traversing unit will
be changed by mm/min(inch/min) and the axis will be traversed at commanded feed
regardless of the rotation of spindle.
2) G99 (feed per revolution)
It changes the feed traversing of axis into 'feed per revolution'. Axis traversing unit
will be changed by mm/rev(inch/rev) and the axis will be traversed at some feed per
1 revolution. In case that the spindle doesn't rotate, the axis doesn't traversing too.
This status is valid in machine lock status.
(4) GOO feeding command (Rapid feed)
GOO is used in rapid feed.
060 I Part 2
Command axis that want to be fed, position accompany with GOO as follows.
I GOO IP; <Command Example>
Absolute command GOO X20.0 Z20.0
Incremental command GOO U20.0 W20.0
CD IP
IP assigns feeding axis and its position.
UPPER UNIT LOWER UNIT C-axis is possible to
X1-axis X_._ u- - X2-axis X_._ u- - execute axis feeding
Z1-axis Z_._ W_._ Z2-axis z- - W_._ command in low clamp

status, and impossible in
C(1) -axis c- - H- - C2-axis c- - H- -
high clamp status.
Y-axis Y_._ V_._ A-axis A_._
Feed rate can be adjusted with 3 levels by the switch shown below.
Rapid feed speed of F100%, FO% are set in Parameter, and under these criterion, the
speed can be adjusted with 3 levels.
F25% means that the axis will be fed at 25% of the speed in F1 00%.
Whenever pressing the switch, the lamp in switch is turned ON or OFF. If the lamp in
switch is turned ON, it means that the speed is set. Rapid traverse speed is different
according to the machine type. Regarding to the exact speed, refer to the specification
of machine.
RAPID OVERRIDE Select FO% The lamps in FO switch will be turned ON.
c:::::::J c:::::::J c:::::::J )
[;I
Select F25% The lamps in F25 switch will be turned ON.
FO 100%
'LJlJ ru-u Select F1 00% The lamps in F1 00 switch will be turned ON.
OPERATION I 061
6. C-axis clamp
Normally the machine consists of C-axes
as shown in right side.
According to the machine type, it will be
decided whether C(1 )-axis is attached or
not and C2-axis is attached or not.
C-axis is operated as spindle basically, it
will be operated as C-axis by C-axis
switching operation. Regarding the C-axis
switching, refer to "6 Spindle selection".
C-axis may need hydraulic clamp
operation during machining if need.
with fixing after dividing C-axis into arbitrary
MAIN SPINDLE jrill, key groove machining.
-----> C(1 )-axis
6.1 C-axis operation
Manual operation is possible using the switches on operation panel. The switches are
shown below
c:::::::J
~
[U/L UNIT selection]
1 Lower unit is selected for selecting C1&C2.
c=:::J
LOWER When Upper unit is selected, X1, Z1, C1 andY-axis.
0~ When Lower unit is selected, X2, Z2, C2 and A-axis.
c=:::J
~
[C-axis spindle selection]
In advance, the lamp in C-axis select switch should
2 be turned ON. If not, refer to "rev. spindle selection"

II ~ 1 in "7. Spindle selection"
II ~ II
II ~=L II
[Automatic mode selection]
C-axis clamp command is only possible thru auto-
3
matic command in M-eade. Change the mode into
automatic mode.
062 I Part 2
[LEFT CHUCK M-code command]
C(1 )-axis high clamp command. The lamp shown
M89;
C1-CLAMP in left side will be turned ON. In this case, clamp-
4 =»
c==)
ing pressure is 40kgf/cm
2
.
C(1 )-axis unclamp command. The lamp shown in

M90;
left side will be turned OFF.
[RIGHT CHUCK M-code command]

C2-axis high clamp command. The lamp shown
M189;
C2-CLAMP in left side will be flickering. In this case,
5 te
c==)
clamping pressure is 40kgf/cm
2
.
C2-axis unclamp command. The lamp shown in

M190;
left side will be turned OFF.
In case that "M89" is used in tapping cycle (G84) as follows, unclamp (M90) command can
be executed repeatedly and automatically without additional command.
G84 H30. Z-25. -15. F1400 K12

M89;
G84 :Start tapping.

H30 :Feed C-axis by incrementing 30 degrees from current position.
M89 : High clamp C-axis.
R-15: Rapid feed from Z20.0 to Z5.0
Z-25. F1400 :Milling tool rotates, and Z-axis feeds. Start tapping.
K12 :After completing tapping once, then repeat it by 12 times.
That is, above block means that C-axis will stop at every 30 degrees, and repeat clamp,
tapping, unclamp, rotating, and execute machining of 12 tapping holes.
~ In upper turret, when tapping job is executed in right side, the program will be made as follows.
M35; (Select Rev.)
M211; (C2-axis control ON)
G84 H30. Z-25. R-15. F1400 K12 M189;
M289; (Left spindle high clamp control)
M212; (C2-axis control OFF)
OPERATION I 063
6.2 Axis traverse and restrictions in C-axis clamp status
Unclamp High clamp
C-axis feeding is C-axis feeding is
Jog feeding
possible impossible
Handle feeding
possible impossible
Automatic feeding
possible impossible
CD In case of switching C-axis into spindle (Main, Right spindle) with c-axis being clamped,
clamp status will be released and changed to unclamp status without any additional
command.
® When C-axis is selected, if DOOR is OPEN, C-axis automatically becomes clamp state
and if DOOR is CLOSED, C-axis becomes unclamp state.
064 I Part 2
7. Spindle Composition and P-code Spindle Rotation Command
U-REV.SPINDLE
For TT-type SPINDLE, it is divided as the above figure and depending on machine,
For the SPINDLE rotation command of the TT equipment to which FS-31 i/31 Oi Series NC is
applied, P-CODE method rotation command is applied.
OPERATION I 065
7.1 P-code Method Spindle Rotation Command
When controlling the multi-spindle of 2 unit multi-equipment, instead of selecting the rotation
main axis from within PMC, select main axis using Address P-code of machining program
and command spindle rotation.
(1) Spindle rotation command format
Maa(command) Sbbb(RPM) Pcc(SPINDLE select):

- aa : 03(CW)/04(CCW),
28(POLYGON),29(RIGID TAP)
- bbb: RPM
- cc : 11(LEFT SPINDLE)
12(MILLING SPINDLE)
(2) Example of 1000rpm rotation command for each spindle

1) In UPPER unit
- M03/M04 S1000P11 :LEFT SPINDLE CW/CCW
- M03/M04 S1000P12: REVOLVING SPINDLE CW/CCW
- M03/M04 S1 OOOP21 : RIGHT SPINDLE CW/CCW
Caution : REVOLVING SPINDLE rotation command (M03/M04 S1000P22) of LOWER
is not supported in UPPER.
(3) In LOWER unit
- M03/M04 S1000P11 :LEFT SPINDLE CW/CCW
- M03/M04 S1000P22: REVOLVING SPINDLE CW/CCW/REV
- M03/M04 S1 OOOP21 : RIGHT SPINDLE CW/CCW
Caution : REVOLVING SPINDLE rotation command (M03/M04 S1000P12) of UPPER
is not supported in LOWER.
7.2 P-CODE Method SPINDLE Rotation Stop

Even when stopping a rotating spindle, must select rotation axis by Address P-CODE.
Spindle stop method by P-CODE is as follows.
-M05 P11 : LEFT SPINDLE stop
-M05 P12: Rev SPINDLE stop
-M05 P21 : RIGHT SPINDLE stop
-M05 P22 : REV. SPINDLE stop
-M315 P11 :LEFT SPINDLE stop(NOT CONFIRM)
-M315 P21 :RIGHT SPINDLE stop(NOT CONFIRM).
066 I Part 2
8. Left Spindle Operation
8.1 Left Spindle Introduction and Rotation Direction
RIGHT Spindle
FOR.ration
FOR. rotation
As shown in the figure above, the spindle facing the right spindle is called the left spindle.
(1) Left spindle function

Using Left spindle, the following main functions can be executed.
-Thread cutting and feeding function per rotation
-Constant spindle speed control function(G96, G97)
- Cs contour contol function
- Rigid tapping function
-Spindle orientation function
-Synchronize with RIGHT spindle function
-Polygon Turning function
I&CAUTIONI
1. For Rigid Tapping function, Synchronize with LEFT spindle function, Polygon Turning
function, refer to Chapter 3.
OPERATION I 067
(2) Left Spindle Rotation Direction
LEFT spindle rotation direction is FWD direction when

rotating CCW, looking in front of the chuck as shown in the
figure on the left, and REV direction when rotating in the
opposite direction.
FOR. Direction REV. Direction

Automatic Automatic Manual
Manual Command
Command Command Command
0 0 0 0 c=::J c=::J c=::J
~~~~
M03S - - M04S - -
P11;
and =:DJ<!> P11; =OJJ and =:DJ<!>
~ ~ 1'.1 START RVS START
When using the M-eade below, the left spindle rotation direction can be to rotate in the
opposite direction than the commanded direction. However, the above command can only
be used in automatic command.
M176; Change rotation direction when commanding spindle rotation with M-eade
M 177 ; Cancel rotation direction change
For example, after "M176" command if "M03 S__ P11" is commanded, LEFT spindle
rotates in REV. direction. This state is valid until M177 is commanded to cancel it.
068 I Part 2
8.2 Left Spindle Rotation Condition
In order to rotate left spindle, conditions for safety should be satisfied. These conditions are
normally almost the same as the conditions for other spindle rotations. Furthermore, in a
special case, it is possible to cancel these conditions and operate a restricted spindle
rotation.
All of the following conditions must be satisfied for LEFT spindle to rotate normally.
Main Rotation Conditions Verification Method

c=::::>
LEFT spindle select status(manual mode)

8] T
LEFT CHUCK
Switch LED is ON
MODE SELECT
[(10~
..,---.....,
LEFT chuck clamp status
[0] LED is ON
Door close status Alarm 2040 did not occur
Q-Setter up status Check Q-Setter status
Safety switch lock status Alarm 2193 did not occur
In case spindle override is not 0% Check spindle override switch
1) Releasing method of restriction conditions for left spindle rotation

CD Restrictions related to chucking
Left spindle cannot be rotated unless the clamp of left chuck is confirmed for safety. But for
the special cases as follows, it is necessary to rotate the spindle even if chuck is unclamped.
- During synchronous control, it is necessary to rotate in unclamped state.
- During bar feeder feeding, it may be necessary to rotate in unclamped state.
To rotate left spindle while left chuck is unclamped, the M-code below is used. The following
operation is executed only in automatic mode.
M31;
-Command "M31" while LEFT chuck is clamped.
- Unclamp left chuck using "M69" command.
-After this, left spindle can be rotated in undamped state.
- In case of clamping again, chucking related restriction release is invalid.
The above operations are only valid if one of the modes below is selected.
c=::::> c=::::>
r~=n!il
~~
OPERATION I 069
I illCAUTION I
1. Spindle rotation using M31 while chuck is undamped is a restricted purpose and must
be excuted with much caution. Execution without caution may damage machine and
injure humans.
2. Spindle rotation while chuck is clamped, is only valid as a automatic command in
automatic mode and spindle cannot be rotated manually.
® Release restriction related to door

Generally, spindle cannot be rotated while the front-side door is open due to safety.
However, for convenience of machine operation, spindle can be rotated with
restriction while the front-side door is open.
· When front-side door is opened on a machine to which Setting
Mode switch is attached.

-Mode switch "OFF": spindle cannot be rotated.
- Mode switch "ON" : Rotation is possible by jogging at 50 rpm
SETTING only.
MODE
When the front-side door is open in a machine where non of the switches are
attached.
-Spindle cannot be rotated.
I illCAUTION I
1. The operations listed above are used restrictively depending on whether or not door
interlock release key or the safey switch is attached is attached to the operation
panel, and prior requests.
2. To operate spindle while door is open is very dangerous. Therefore, sufficient
verification and caution is necessary when operating. If not, machines may get
damaged and humans can get injured.
070 I Part 2
8.3 LEFT Spindle manual operation
(1) Manual operation valid mode
When the upper unit and left spindle is selected and the mode is in manual mode, if
rotatoin condition is satisfied, then the left spindle can be operated manually.
UPPER unit is selected
LEFT SPINDLE is selected

LEFT
HANDLE AXIS SELECT
One of the modes on the right is

selected
(2) Left spindle speed during manual operation

Spindle speed in manual operation is decided by the value that was commanded with
S-code in automatic mode. Therefore, in the case that spindle rotation is not
commanded automatically after NC power is turned ON initially, left spindle manual
operation cannot cause actual rotation. For example, if S 1000 was commanded
previously, if spindle rotation command is given manually at 100% spindle override,
spindle will rotate by 1000 r.p.m.
(3) FWD./REV. rotation and jogging
CD 0 Operation Sequence
c:::::::J c=:::)
CD Main spindle is selected or
~ ~
select main spindle.
FWD
c=:::) ® Press FWD rotation selection
D T
switch to operate FWD rotation.
=:::[jJ
LEFT c=:::) c=:::) CD Select main spindle.
REV :::OP =:DJ(I) C2) Press REV rotation switch to
RVS START operate REV rotation.
OPERATION I 071
c=::J CD Select main spindle.
JOGG
lNG
Ga G
C2) FWD rotation will operate as
long as JOGGING selection
switch is pressed.
Under normal conditions, if the commands are given as above, the spindle rotates and
LED on spindle rotation switch turns ON while the spindle rotates.
(4) Manu I stop on rotating spindle

Press the switch shown on the left, then rotating spindle will stop. However,
stop switch operation is only valid in manual mode (handle mode, jog mode,
STOP REF. point return mode).
I&CAUTIONI
1. After commanding spindle stop, spindle will not stop instantly but decelerate and stop.
Therefore check that the spindle stops completely before opening the front-side door. To
open the front-side door without checking that spindle stops may cause accident.
8.4 Left spindle automatic operation

(1) Automatic operation enable mode
Even if left spindle is not selected, command M-eade relating left spindle operation,
then left spindle will be selected and execute operation if the conditions of left spindle
rotation is satisfied. In this case, though another spindle is rotating, it will stop and the
above operation will be executed. The spindle automatci command is available only if
the automatic mode is selected.
c=::J c=::J
~ ~
MEM MDI
(2) LEFT spindle automatic command

Command M-eade, S-code, and P-code and the left spindle can be commanded
automatically.
M03S_P11 ; LEFT spindle forward rotation
M04S_P11 ; LEFT spindle reverse rotation
M463S_P11 ; LEFT spindle forward rotation & coolant ON
M464S_P11 ; LEFT spindle reverse rotation & coolant ON
072 I Part 2
1) Command M03/M04S_P11 together
Left spindle will be rotated with the speed commanded by S-code and in the
directoin commanded by M-eade.
2) Command M03/04_ only
If S_P11 was commanded in advance, since S-code and P-code are available as
modals for NC, it will rotate with the previous speed command but if there is no S-code
or P-code command after turning ON the power, the spindle does not actually rotate.
3) Command S_P11
If S-code is comanded during spindle rotation, spindle speed will accelerate or
decelerate by commanded S-code.
If S-code is commanded when the spindle is stopped, spindle does not rotate. After this,
in case of commanding M03 or M04 separately, spindle will rotate with the speed
commanded by S-code.
I &CAUTION!
1.1n case of commanding spindle rotation in G96 mode (constant surface control
function), spindle does not rotate with the speed commanded by S-code. In order to
rotate with the speed commanded by S-code, set spindle override to 100% and
command G97 mode (constant surface control function release).
2.1n case of commanding spindle rotation in M-eade, if actual speed is less than the
speed commanded by S-code, commanded M-eade does not finish and alarm 2054 will
occur. Check the status of spindle override.
(3) Stop the rotating spindle

If the following M-eade is commanded, the rotating spindle can be stopped.
M05 P11 ; LEFT spindle stop
M465 P11 ; LEFT spindle stop & coolant OFF
M02 or M30 ; Machining program end & return to top of program
MOO or M01 ; Machining program hold
(If MOO, M01 finish by cycle start switch and when restarting the program,
spindle will rotate again without any additional command)
I&CAUTIONI
1. The methods to stop spinde during rotation are as follows. The spindle will stop its
rotation regardless of its operation mode.
OPERATION I 073
- In case of pressing reset switch in MDI panel
- In case of pressing emergency stop switch in operation panel.
- In case of opening the front-side door (However, for machines that have safety
switch, the door cannot be opened during spindle rotation.)
Therefore check that the spindle stops completely before opening the front-side door.
To open the front-side door without checking that spindle has stopped may cause
accident.
8.5 Left spindle override operation

In can be used for changing actual r.p.m. without changing commanded r.p.m. of spindle (S
command r.p.m.). Spindle speed can be adjusted from 0% to 150% by 10% increments,
regardless of mode. For example, if commanded r.p.m. is 1000 r.p.m., spindle will rotate as
follows according to the status of spindle override.
0%: 0 rpm, 50%: 500 rpm, 80%: 800 rpm, 100%: 1000 rpm, 150%: 1500 rpm,
However, in case of exceeding the maximum r.p.m. of spindle, even if override is operated,
r.p.m. will not increase.
Regarding the following cases, spindle speed will be

fixed at 100% regardless of spindle override switch.
CD During spindle orientation command
~ During tapping operation
@ In Rigid Tapping mode

0 ® In Polygon Turning mode
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
I &CAUTION!
1. In case that tapping mode is not completed correctly using G80 after tapping command
(G84 ), spindle override switch may not operate correctly. Be sure that tapping mode should
be released by G80.
2. The rpm of right spindle can be changed using spindle override switch when the right
spindle is commanded to rotate in UPPER PROGRAM.
074 I Part 2
8.6 LEFT spindle orientation
Orientation is the function to stop spindle at the specific position. It can be used in case that
the phase control of workpiece is needed. There are two kinds of orientation as follows.
* 1 Position Orientation : Stop at 1 position only.
* Multi Position Orientation : Stop position can be modified by commanding stop position.
(1) 1 Position Orientation

1) Command method
Left spindle will execute orientation by the following M-eade.
Because spindle can stop at 1 position only, stop position cannot be modified in
program.
M19;
2) Modifiy stop position
If left spindle part is modified in paramter as follows, stop position can be modified.
Paramter NO. 4077
In case of adding or subtracting "angle to be rotated -;- 4095" from our current
setting value, stop position will be changed by the angle to be rotated.
(2) Multi-point Orientation

1) Command method
Left spindle will execute orientation by the following M-eade and S-code.
Stop position can be modified in program by commanded S-code.
M19 S (S "angle to be stopped X 10" ) ;
2) Modify stop position

Stop position can be modified by S-code commanded with M19.
Command the value of "angle to be stopped x 10" as S-code.
For example, command "M19 S1800" , then left spindle will stop at the position of
180 degrees from the position where left spindle stops by "SO" command.
I&CAUTIONI
1.0rientation cannot be commanded in G96 mode (constant surface control
function).
If orientation is commanded in G96 mode, orientation command time over alarm
will occur.
Command orientation in G97 mode.
2.Command orientation during rotation, then spindle will stop after orientation.
OPERATION I 075
8.7 Left spindle output changeover
Left spindle can changeover power connection of spindle motor according to the
specification of spindle motor attached to the machine. This function will be adopted insome
machines only.
Usually output characteristics can be changed into
Spindle Amp. Module 2 kinds of states as follows.
uv w *Low speed connection (Y-connection);
KM20 is "ON", KM21 is "OFF"
*High speed connection (L-connection) ;
KM21 r~ KM20
KM20 : Magnetic Contacter for low
<)< )0 ?,< )~ speed connection
\ \\ \ \
KM21 : Magnetic Contacter for high
(~1 )( )) speed connection
The maximum speed that is possible for rotation in

each connection state will be restricted and even if
the speed exceeding the restricted speed is
XYZ
u v w Spindle motor
commmanded, it is impossible to rotate at the
speed greater than the restricted speed.
In addition, changeover should be done in accordancce with the operation speed in advance
because changeover cannot be done automatically in accordance with commanded speed.
(1) Automatic changeover
c:::::::J CD Automatic mode should be selected and left spindle
~ ~ must not be in C-axis selection state.
LI...M_E_M--!1~ C2) Changeover command is possible regardless of

rotation and stop of left spindle.
® Changeover will be exeucted if M-eade listed below is
commanded.
M261 :Changeover into low speed connection state
M262 : Changeover into high speed connection state
076 I Part 2
I itCAUTION I
1. Command is possible regardless of spindle stop and rotation.
2. Required output cannot be generated because power supply to motor is cut off during
changeover. Therefore changeover command should not be commanded during cutting. If
not, it could cause machine damage.
3. In case of changing to low speed connection during high speed rotation, more attention
should be paid because the rotating speed of spindle will be restricted by the maximum
speed in low speed connection.
4. In case of changing to high speed connection during low speed rotation, if commanded
speed set in advance is greater than the restricted speed, spindle will be rotated at
commanded high speed as soon as changeover is completed into high speed. Therefore
more attention should be paid.
5. Changeover should be commanded according with operatoin speed in advance since
changeover is not executed automatically according with commanded speed.
6. If the machine is in the following state, changeover cannot be executed if commanded.
Release the following states prior to executing changeover.
- Emergency stop state
- LEFT spindle not selected state
- Orientation in progress
- Synchronous tapping in progress
7. Winding changeover operation can be executed only if in same path. Spindle winding
changeover cannot be executed in another path.
OPERATION I 077
9. Rev. spindle operation
9.1 Rev. spindle introduction and rotation direction
U-REV.SPINDLE
-Rev. spindle manual operatoin

Generally used in milling.
Rev. spindle is only attached to some machine types depending on machine
specifications.
(1) Rev. spindle function

Rev. spindle can be used to execute the following major functions.
- Normal rotation function

- Constant surface control function (G96, G97)
-Tapping function (Normal tapping and rigid tapping)
-Polygon turning function with left(REV.) spindle
I&CAUTIONI
1. Regarding rigid tapping function, polygon turning function, refer to Chapter 3.
078 I Part 2
(2) Rev. spindle rotation direction
Regarding the rotating direction of Rev. tool spindle, looking from the rear of the tool
holder, CW is forward rotation and CCW is reverse rotation. Regarding Rev. spindle
commanding method with direction, refer to the table as follows.

Manual Command
c::::::::) c:::::::J M04S - - P12; c:::::::J c:::::::J
M03S - - P12;
(UPPER)
M03S - - P21;
(LOWER); [;] D
and =IJJ(I)
START
(UPPER)
M04S - - P21;
(LOWER);
[;] ~ s
and
T
In case of using the M-eade listed below, it is possible to rotate rev. spindle to the opposite
direction with commanded direction. However, these commands can be only used when
spindle is rotated by M-eade.
M176; In case of commanding spindle rotation in M-eade, rotating direction will be reversed.
M 177 ; Rotating direction reversal release
For example, in case of commanding "M03 P12" after commanding "M176", rev. spindle will
be rotated in reverse direction.
Above status is valid until commanding "M177" to release.
OPERATION I 079
9.2 Rotation conditions of Rev. spindle
In order to rotate Rev. spindle, conditions for safety should be satisfied. These conditions
are normally same with another spindle's. In a special case, the operation that rotates
spindle restrictively is possible with releasing these conditions.
All of the conditions that follow should be satisfied for normal rotation of Rev. spindle to be
possible.
Major rotation conditions Checking method
Rev. spindle selection state c:::::::J c:::::::J
(manual mode)
~ LED is ON ~ LED is ON
: C1(C2)-axis is selected RFV REV
LEFT CHUCK RIGHT CHUCK

MODE SELECT MODE SELECT
LEFT or RIGHT chuck is [[]10~

..,--........, LED is ON roO.ru
..,--........, LED is ON
clamped
[0] ITS]
Door is closed Alarm 2040 did not occur
Q-Setter Up state Check Q-Setter state
Safety switch lock state Alarm 2193 did not occur
spindle override is not 0% Check spindle override switch
(1) The method to release rotate restriction condition of Rev. spindle

1) Restrictions related to chucking
In order to rotate Rev. spindle, one or more of left or right chuck should be clamped.
But in special cases, Rev. spindle can be rotated with unclamp state in both chucks.
To rotate Rev. spindle in unclamp state of left chuck, execute the M-eade below.
Following operation is correctly executed only in automatic mode.
M31 ;
-Command "M31" in clamp state of left chuck.
- Unclamp left chuck using "M69" command.
-After this, rev. spindle can be rotated in unclamp state.

- In case of clamping again, restriction release related to chucking becomes invalid.
To rotate right spindle while right chuck is clamped, execute the following M-eade.
The following operation can be executed only in automatic mode.
M131 ;
-Command "M131" in clamp state of right chuck.
- Unclamp right chuck using "M169" command.
080 I Part 2
-After this, right spindle can be rotated in unclamp state.
- In case of clamping again, restriction release related to chucking becomes invalid.
If two M-codes are used, Rev. spindle can be rotated in undamped state of both chucks.
The above operations are available only when one of the following mode is selected.
c=::J c=::J
~00
I &CAUTION I
1. Spindle rotatoin in the unclamp state of chuck using M31, M131 must be executed
with much caution. Execution without caution may cause machine damage or human
injury.
2. Spindle rotation in the unclamp state of chuck is only valid in automatic command or
automatic mode. In manual mode, spindle rotation is impossible.
2) Release restriction related to door

Spindle cannot be rotated when the front-side door is open for safety. However, for
convenience of machine operation, spindle can be rotated restrictively when the
front-side door is open.
• When the front-side door is open in a machine to which
Setting Mode position is attached.
-Mode switch "OFF" Spindle cannot be rotated.
- Mode switch "ON" Rotation is possible by

SETTING
MODE JOGGING at 50rpm only.
• When the front-side door is open in the machine where none of the switches are
attached.
OPERATION I 081
9.3 Rev. spindle manual operation
(1) Manual operation enable mode
When the REV. SPINDLE is selected in UPPER(LOWER) unit and the mode is manual
mode, if rotation condition is satisfied, the UPPER(LOWER) REV. SPINDLE can be
operated manually.
UPPER LOWER
c:::::::J c=:::J
~
Select related unit for REV. LOWER
SPINDLE manual operation 0:rr
rn
c=:::J l J
REV. SPINDLE selected state ~

REV
HANDLE AXIS SELECT

selected
(2) Rev. spindle speed in manual operation

Spindle speed in manual operation will be decided by the value that was commanded
with S-code in automatic mode. Therefore, in case that spindle rotation is not
commanded automatically after NC power ON at the first time, Rev. spindle cannot
cause actual rotation.
For example, if S1 000 is commanded, in case of commanding spindle rotation manually
with 100% spindle override, spindle will rotate at 1OOOrpm.
082 I Part 2
(3) Forward · Reverse rotation and jogging operation
CD ® Operation Sequence
0 0 0 0 c::::::J
CD Rev. spindle is selected or
select rev. spindle.
~~~~ ~
w
FWD c::::::J
oo m 111
® Press FWD rotation selection
T
c::::::J c::::::J CD Select Rev. spindle.

Or =:DJ(I)
REV :::OP ® Press REV rotation switch to
rn
c:::::::J RVS START operate REV rotation.
c::::::J CD Select Rev. spindle.
~
JOGG ® FWD rotation will operate as
lNG
G long as JOGGING selection switch
is pressed ..
(4) Manual spindle stop on rotating spindle

c:::::::J Press the switch shown on the left, then rotating spindle will stop. However,
rr;;;l stop switch operation is only valid in manual mode (handle mode, jog mode,
IL.::J REF. point return mode).
I&CAUTIONI
open the front-side door without checking that spindle stops may cause accident.
OPERATION I 083
9.4 Rev. spindle automatic operation
Even if Rev. spindle is not selected, command M-eade relating Rev. spindle operation,
then Rev. spindle will be selected and execute operation if the conditions of Rev.
spindle rotation is satisfied. In this case, though another spindle is rotating, it will stop
and the above operation will be executed. The spindle automatic command is available
only if the automatic mode is selected.
c:::::::::) c:::::::::)
[£][!]
(2) Rev. spindle automatic command
automatically. However, LOWER unit REV. spindle rotation command cannot be called
on UPPER unit and vice versa.
UPPER unit
M03S_P12 ; Rev. spindle forward rotation
M04S_P12 ; Rev. spindle reverse rotation
M463S_P12 ; Rev. spindle forward rotation & coolant ON
M464S_P12 ; Rev. spindle reverse rotation & coolant ON
LOWER unit
M03S_P22 ; Rev. spindle forward rotation
M04S_P22 ; Rev. spindle reverse rotation
M463S_P22 ; Rev. spindle forward rotation & coolant ON
M464S_P22 ; Rev. spindle reverse rotation & coolant ON
1) Command M03/M04S_P12(P22) together

REV. spindle will be rotated with the speed commanded by S-code and in the
2) Command M03/04_ only
If S_P12(P22) was commanded in advance, since S-code and P-code are
available as modals for NC, it will rotate with the previous speed command but if
there is no S-code or P-code command after turning ON the power, the spindle does
not actually rotate.
3) Command S_P12(P22)
084 I Part 2
If S-code is commanded when the spindle is stopped, spindle does not rotate. After
this, in case of commanding M03 or M04 separately, spindle will rotate with the
speed commanded by S-code.
I&CAUTIONI
1. In case of commanding spindle rotation in G96 mode (constant surface control
function), spindle does not rotate with the speed commanded by S-code. In order to
rotate with the speed commanded by S-code, set spindle override to 100% and
command G97 mode (constant surface control function release).
2. In case of commanding spindle rotation in M-eade, if actual speed is less than the
speed commanded by S-code, commanded M-eade does not finish and alarm 2054
will occur. Check the status of spindle override.

M05 P12 ; LEFT spindle stop
M05 P22: Rev. spindle stop(LOWER)
(If MOO, M01 finish by cycle start switch and when restarting the program, spindle
will rotate again without any additional command)
I&CAUTIONI
-In case of pressing reset switch in MDI panel
- In case of opening the front-side door (However, for machines that have safety
switch, the door cannot be opened during spindle rotation.)
OPERATION I 085
9.5 Rev. spindle override operation
fO%: 0 rpm, 50%: 500 rpm, 80%: 800 rpm, 100%: 1000 rpm,
150%: 1500 rpm,
However, in case of exceeding the maximum r.p.m. of spindle,

even if override is operated, r.p.m. will not increase.
0 Regarding the following cases, spindle speed will be fixed at 100%

SPINDLE OVERRIDE
regardless of spindle override switch.

~ During tapping operation
C2) In Polygon Turning mode
I&CAUTIONI
1. In case that tapping mode is not completed correctly using G80 after tapping command
be released by G80.
9.6 Rev. spindle orientation

Rev. spindle orientation is executed automatically for special purposes such as tool index
and cannot be commanded arbitrarily.
I &CAUTION!
1. Rev. spindle of Parameter N0.4077 is a necessary part of the machine operation and if
changed arbitrarily, it could cause machine damage. Therefore, do not change the value set
during shipping.
086 I Part 2
10. RIGHT spindle operation
10.1 RIGHT spindle introduction and rotation direction
RIGHT spindle
FWD rotation
LEFT spindle
Rotation direction
As shown in the figure above, the spindle facing the LEFT spindle is called RIGHT spindle.
RIGHT spindle. Depending on machine specifications, it is attached to only some machine
types.
(1) RIGHT spindle function

RIGHT spindle is used to execute the following functions.
-Thread cutting and feed per revolution function
- Constant surface control function(G96, G97)
- Cs contouring control function
- Rigid tapping function
-spindle orientation function
-Synchronous control with LEFT spindle
-Polygon Turning function
I&CAUTIONI
1.Regarding RIGID TAPPING function, synchronizing control function with left spindle and
polygon turning function, refer to chapter 3.
OPERATION I 087
(2) RIGHT Spindle Rotation Direction
Fo~~-SPINDLE RIGHT spindle rotation direction is REV direction when

rotating CCW, looking in front of the chuck as shown in the
rotation
figure on the left, and FWD direction when rotating in the
,
opposite direction.
/~ Refer to table below for RIGHT spindle command method

depending on direction.

Manual Command
c=::::) c::::::J c::::::J c::::::J
~ ~ ~
M03S - - M04S - -
P21;
and =:DJ P21;
and
D START s T
When using the M-eade below, the RIGHT spindle rotation direction can be to rotate in the
opposite direction than the commanded direction. However, the above command can only
be used in automatic command.
M176; Change rotation direction when commanding spindle rotation with M-eade
M177; Cancel rotation direction change
For example, after "M176" command if "M03 S__ P21" is commanded, RIGHT spindle
rotates in REV. direction. This state is valid until M177 is commanded to cancel it.
088 I Part 2
10.2 RIGHT Spindle Rotation Condition
In order to rotate left spindle, conditions for safety should be satisfied. These conditions are
normally almost the same as the conditions for other spindle rotations. Furthermore, in a
special case, it is possible to cancel these conditions and operate a restricted spindle
rotation.
All of the following conditions must be satisfied for RIGHT spindle to rotate normally.
Main Rotation Conditions Verification Method

~
RIGHT spindle select status(manual mode) err:= Switch LED is ON

RIGHT
RIGHT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
RIGHT chuck clamp status

roO.ru
..,--....,
c=::J
LOWER
[§1] LED is ON
0~
Door close status Alarm 2040 did not occur

Q-Setter up status Check Q-Setter status
Safety switch lock status Alarm 2193 did not occur
In case spindle override is not 0% Check spindle override switch
(1) Releasing method of restriction conditions for RIGHT spindle rotation

1) Restrictions related to chucking
Left spindle cannot be rotated unless the clamp of left chuck is confirmed for safety. But
for the special cases as follows, it is necessary to rotate the spindle even if chuck is
undamped.
-During synchronous control, it is necessary to rotate in undamped state.
-During bar feeder feeding, it may be necessary to rotate in undamped state.
To rotate RIGHT spindle while left chuck is undamped, the M-eade below is used. The
following operation is executed only in automatic mode.
M131 ;
-Command "M131" while RIGHT chuck is clamped.
- Unclamp RIGHT chuck using "M169" command.
-After this, left spindle can be rotated in undamped state.
- In case of clamping again, chucking related restriction release is invalid.
OPERATION I 089
The above operations are only valid if one of the modes below is selected.
c:::::::J c:::::::J
~~
~~
I&CAUTIONI
1.Spindle rotation using M131 while chuck is undamped is a restricted purpose and must be
executed with much caution. Execution without caution may damage machine and injure
humans.
2.Spindle rotation while chuck is clamped, is only valid as a automatic command in
automatic mode and spindle cannot be rotated manually.
(2) Release restriction related to door

Generally, spindle cannot be rotated while the front-side door is open due to safety.
However, for convenience of machine operation, spindle can be rotated with restriction
while the front-side door is open.
• When front-side door is opened on a machine to which
Setting Mode switch is attached.

-Mode switch "OFF" : Spindle cannot be rotated
0
SETTING
- Mode switch "ON" : Rotation is possible by jogging at 50
rpm only.
MODE
• When the front-side door is open in a machine where non of the switches are attached.
I&CAUTIONI
1. The operations listed above are used restrictively depending on whether or not door
interlock release key or the safey switch is attached is attached to the operation panel, and
prior requests.
2. To operate spindle while door is open is very dangerous. Therefore, sufficient
verification and caution is necessary when operating. If not, machines may get damaged
and humans can get injured.
090 I Part 2
10.3 RIGHT Spindle manual operation
(1) Manual operation valid mode
When the LOWER unit and RIGHT spindle is selected and the mode is in manual mode,
if rotation condition is satisfied, then the RIGHT spindle can be operated manually.
c=::J
LOWER
LOWER unit is selected
0:rr
c:::::::)
I ~~TI
RIGHT SPINDLE is selected
HANDLE AXIS SELECT

:xz
~{@)·
c::::::::J c=::J c=::J
selected 0
REF ~OG
@)
HANDLE
(2) Right spindle speed during manual operation

Spindle speed in manual operation is decided by the value that was commanded with
S-code in automatic mode. Therefore, in the case that spindle rotation is not
commanded automatically after NC power is turned ON initially, RIGHT spindle manual
operation cannot cause actual rotation. For example, if S 1000 was commanded
previously, if spindle rotation command is given manually at 100% spindle override,
spindle will rotate by 1000 r.p.m.
(3) FWD./REV. rotation and jogging
CD 0 Operation Sequence
CD Right spindle is selected or
0 0 0 0 c=::J
select main spindle.
~~~~ =:DJ(I)
FWD
oo m 1:1
® Press FWD rotation selection
START
c:::::::)
c=::J c=::J ® Select Right spindle.
REV
1 ~~ 1 [;J ~ s T
@ Press REV rotation switch to
operate REV rotation.
c=::J ® Select Right spindle.
~
JOGG @FWD rotation will operate as
lNG
G long as JOGGING selection
switch is pressed.
OPERATION I 091
Under normal conditions, if the commands are given as above, the spindle rotates and LED
on spindle rotation switch turns ON while the spindle rotates.
(4) Manul stop on rotating spindle
Press the switch shown on the left, then rotating spindle will stop.
However, stop switch operation is only valid in manual mode (handle
mode, jog mode, REF. point return mode).
I&CAUTIONI
Therefore check that the spindle stops completely before opening the front-side door.
To open the front-side door without checking that spindle stops may cause accident.
10.4 RIGHT spindle automatic operation

Even if RIGHT spindle is not selected, command M-eade relating RIGHT spindle
operation, then RIGHT spindle will be selected and execute operation if the conditions
of RIGHT spindle rotation is satisfied. In this case, though another spindle is rotating, it
will stop and the above operation will be executed. The spindle automatci command is
available only if the automatic mode is selected.
c:::::::J c:::::::J
~~
(2) RIGHT spindle automatic command
automatically.
M03S_P21 ; RIGHT spindle forward rotation

M04S_P21 ; RIGHT spindle reverse rotation
CD Command M03/M04S_P11 together

RIGHT spindle will be rotated with the speed commanded by S-code and in the
® Command M03/04_ only
If S_P21 was commanded in advance, since S-code and P-code are available
as modals for NC, it will rotate with the previous speed command but if there is
092 I Part 2
no S-code or P-code command after turning ON the power, the spindle does not
actually rotate.
@ Command S_P21
If S-code is commanded when the spindle is stopped, spindle does not rotate.
After this, in case of commanding M03 or M04 separately, spindle will rotate with
the speed commanded by S-code.
I &CAUTION I
1. In case of commanding spindle rotation in G96 mode (constant surface control function),
spindle does not rotate with the speed commanded by S-code. In order to rotate with the
speed commanded by S-code, set spindle override to 100% and command G97 mode
(constant surface control function release).
2. In case of commanding spindle rotation in M-eade, if actual speed is less than the speed
commanded by S-code, commanded M-eade does not finish and alarm 2054 will occur.
Check the status of spindle override.
(3) Stop the rotating spindle

M05 P21 ; RIGHT spindle stop
M465 P21 ; RIGHT spindle stop & coolant OFF
(If MOO, M01 finish by cycle start switch and when restarting the program, spindle
will rotate again without any additional command)
I &CAUTION!
- In case of pressing reset switch in MDI panel
- In case of opening the front-side door (However, for machines that have safety switch, the
door cannot be opened during spindle rotation.)
open the front-side door without checking that spindle has stopped may cause accident.
OPERATION I 093
10.5 RIGHT spindle override operation
0%: 0 rpm, 50%: 500 rpm, 80%: 800 rpm, 100%: 1000 rpm, 150%: 1500 rpm,
However, in case of exceeding the maximum r.p.m. of spindle, even if override is operated,
r.p.m. will not increase.
Regarding the following cases, spindle override command will be cancelled.

C2) During tapping operation
® In Rigid Tapping mode
@In Polygon Turning mode
0
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
I&CAUTIONI
1.1n case that tapping mode is not completed correctly using G80 after tapping command
be released by G80.
2.The rpm of RIGHT spindle can be changed using spindle override switch when the RIGHT
spindle is commanded to rotate in LOWER PROGRAM.
094 I Part 2
10.6 RIGHT spindle orientation
Orientation is the function to stop spindle at the specific position. It can be used in case that
the phase control of workpiece is needed. There are two kinds of orientation as follows.
* 1 Position Orientation : Stop at 1 position only.
* Multi Position Orientation : Stop position can be modified by commanding stop position.
(1) 1 Position Orientation

1) Command method
RIGHT spindle will execute orientation by the following M-eade.
Because spindle can stop at 1 position only, stop position cannot be modified in
program.
M119;
2) Modifiy stop position
If RIGHT spindle part is modified in paramter as follows, stop position can be
modified.
Paramter NO. 4077
In case of adding or subtracting "angle to be rotated -;- 4095" from our current
setting value, stop position will be changed by the angle to be rotated.
(2) Multi-point Orientation

1) Command method
Left spindle will execute orientation by the following M-eade and S-code.
Stop position can be modified in program by commanded S-code.
M119 S (S "angle to be stopped X 10" ) ;
2) Modify stop position

Stop position can be modified by S-code commanded with M119.
Command the value of "angle to be stopped x 10" as S-code.
For example, command "M119 S1800" , then RIGHT spindle will stop at the position
of 180 degrees from the position where left spindle stops by "SO" command.
I illCAUTION I
1.0rientation cannot be commanded in G96 mode (constant surface control
function).
If orientation is commanded in G96 mode, orientation command time over alarm will
occur. Command orientation in G97 mode.
2.Command orientation during rotation, then spindle will stop after orientation.
OPERATION I 095
10.7 Right spindle output changeover
Left spindle can changeover power connection of spindle motor according to the
specification of spindle motor attached to the machine. This function will be adopted insome
machines only.
Usually output characteristics can be changed

Splncll Amp. NodiH into 2 kinds of states as follows.
u vw *Low speed connection (Y-connection);
*High speed connection (L-connection) ;
KM121 r~ I<Nl 20 KM 120 : Mag netic Contacter for low

C)( ,)1 ) ~c )~ speed connection
\ '
1)1 )()
\ \
_(IC )0
KM121 : Magnetic Contacter for high
speed connection
The maximum speed that is possible for
rotation in each connection state will be
restricted and even if the speed exceeding the
restricted speed is commmanded, it is
u vw X Y Z
Sphla Motor impossible to rotate at the speed greater than
the restricted speed.
In addition, changeover should be done in accordancce with the operation speed in advance
because changeover cannot be done automatically in accordance with commanded speed.
(1) Automatic changeover

1) Automatic mode should be selected and left spindle must not be in C-axis selection
state.
c:::::::::) c:::::::::)
[£]00
2) Changeover command is possible regardless of rotation and stop of left spindle.
3) Changeover will be exeucted if M-eade listed below is commanded.
M261 :Changeover into low speed connection state
M262 :Changeover into high speed connection state
096 I Part 2
I itCAUTION I
1. Command is possible regardless of spindle stop and rotation.
2. Required output cannot be generated because power supply to motor is cut off
during changeover. Therefore changeover command should not be commanded during
cutting. If not, it could cause machine damage.
3. In case of changing to low speed connection during high speed rotation, more
attention should be paid because the rotating speed of spindle will be restricted by the
maximum speed in low speed connection.
4. In case of changing to high speed connection during low speed rotation, if
commanded speed set in advance is greater than the restricted speed, spindle will be
rotated at commanded high speed as soon as changeover is completed into high speed.
Therefore more attention should be paid.
5. Changeover should be commanded according with operatoin speed in advance since
changeover is not executed automatically according with commanded speed.
6. If the machine is in the following state, changeover cannot be executed if
commanded. Release the following states prior to executing changeover.
- Emergency stop state
-LEFT spindle not selected state
- Orientation in progress
-Synchronous tapping in progress
7. Winding changeover operation can be executed only if in same path. Spindle winding
changeover cannot be executed in another path.
OPERATION I 097
11. Chucking operation
The chuck is the device that fixes the
workpiece to be machined with the hydraulic
or air pressure, and is rotated accompany with
workpiece by spindle motor.
The workpiece clamped in chuck will be
machined by the tool attached to turret.
The chuck can fix the workpiece by means of
3 jaws which are acted by hydraulic pressure
etc. as shown in right side figure.
In case that the shape of workpiece or the
condition of machining is peculiar, special type chuck such as index chuck etc. would be
used.
Chcuking Detect / C(1 )-axis Clamping Unit

Sensor
(Option)
Chuck
Piston for chucking
Detecter
Rotary hydraulic cylinder Built in Spindle Motor
098 I Part 2
11.1 Chuck operation
Chuck can be operated in manual using switches as listed below that are located on the
chucking mode operation panel.
According to the shape of workpiece and the conditions of machining, chucking methods
can be divided into two kinds of methods as follows.
(1) Chucking mode

1) Inward mode (ID mode)
As shown in left side, jaw of chuck is
[Clamp] [Unclamp]
clamped/ undamped as it is operated in
[]~
the direction of arrows.
{;J
If the jaw clamps the outside of workpiece
as it moves inward, workpiece will be
clamped to fix. If jaw moves in the oppo-
site direction, workpiece will be
undamped.
2) Outward mode (OD mode)

As shown in left side, jaw of chuck is
[Clamp] [Unclamp]
clamped/ undamped as it is operated in
the direction of arrows.
If the jaw clamps the inside of workpiece
as it moves outward, workpiece will be
clamped to fix. If jaw moves in the
opposite direction, workpiece will be
undamped.
OPERATION I 099
(2) Chucking mode decision
Operator should check the current chucking mode before operation, and check the setting is
correct according with workpiece.
Chucking mode can be changed by using chucking mode select switch on the operation
panel as shown below.
Change into inward mode Change into outward mode
Left chuck Right chuck Left chuck Right chuck

LEFT CHUCK RIGHT CHUCK LEFT CHUCK RIGHT CHUCK
MODE SELECT MODE SELECT MODE SELECT MODE SELECT
[JJ O ~ ro~
O ~W [JJ O ~ ro O ~W
~ ~ ~
[§1] [1 [22] [§1]
I &CAUTION!
1. Be sure not to change the chucking mode during spindle rotation or automatic operation
of machine. If not, the machine may be damaged due to stopping of automatic
operation or spindle.
100 I Part 2
11.2 Restrictions in machine operation according to the status of chucking
There are some restrictions in machine operation in case of the unclamp status of chuck as
follows.
-Rotation command of spindle cannot be executed.
(However, in case of commanding M-eade M31 or M131 to release restrictions with regard
to chucking, rotation command of spindle can be executed. Regarding the more details,
refer to the corresponding section of spindle operation.)
-Automatic operation of machine cannot be started.
(However, in case of commanding M-eade M31 or M131 to release restrictions with regard
to chucking, automatic operation of machine can be started. Regarding the more details,
refer to the corresponding section of automatic operation of machine.)
-MOO, M01 cannot be finished.
(In case of unclamping chuck in MOO, M01 during automatic operation, be sure to finish MOO,
M01 after clamping.)
11.3 Chuck clamp/unclamp check

There are 2 kinds of methods to check whether workpiece is clamped completely or not.
-If time elapsed after commanding, judge it as chucking is completed.
- Grasping the position of chuck cylinder using proximity sensor, judge it as chucking is
completed (option).
The detecting method of chuck status can be modified according to the setting value of
Keep relay as follows.
Set to "0" Detect the status of left chuck using proximity sensor.
K7.6
Set to "1" Detect the status of left chuck not using proximity sensor.
Set to "0" Detect the status of right chuck using proximity sensor.
K7.7
Set to "1" Detect the status of right chuck not using proximity sensor.
Checking whether chucking is done or not is used as the start condition of spindle and auto-
matic operation, finishing condition of chuck operation M-eade. Therefore, appropriate
adjusting is needed in case of changing of machining workpiece.
According to the type of machine, the method to check the status of chuck by means of
detecting directly the operation distance of chuck cylinder using special magnetic sensors, is
used as option.
OPERATION I 101
(1) Method to check chucking by the time elapse after command
Command M68 or M69

Command M168 or M169
The method to judge operation as completed
without additional checking after commanding
Chuck clamp or unclamp chuck clamp or unclamp.
operates However, in case of commanding chuck clamp/
unclamp in M-eade, commanded M-eade will be
finished after the time set in PMC timer elapsed,
and the next automatic command can be executed.
NO
- TM30 (setting unit : msec) : left chuck

- TM130 (setting unit: msec): right chuck
Finish M68 or M6
Finish M168 or M169
If a special adjusting isn't needed at shipping, it will be set by 2000 (2sec).

Considering the size of workpiece, chuck jaw etc., the time from the start of actual
clamp/ unclamp operation to the finish of operation will be set. But if the time is set to
the value less than the time of actual operation, it is very dangerous because the
machine will start to operate before the chucking operation is not finished yet. Therefore,
in case that the setting time needs to be modified, be sure to set the time after checking
actual operation time.
(2) Method to check chucking by using proximity sensor (option)

This is the method to detect current clamp and unclamp status of chuck by means of
attaching 2 proximity sensors, which detect the status of chuck, to the opposite end part
of chuck (the part of rotary hydraulic cylinder).
If rotary hydraulic cylinder is operated, then the piston in opposite side of chuck jaw will
be operated together. The status of clamp and unclamp of chuck can be checked by
detecting the position of piston using 2 proximity sensors.
In case of operating chuck with M-eade during automatic operation, commanded M-
eade will be executed after confirming the operation of proximity sensor.
In case of rotating spindle in manual, spindle is possible to rotate normally after
confirming the operation of proximity sensor.
102 I Part 2
1) Inward mode (I D mode)
SX11 SX12 SX11 SX12
§ B
(SX111) (SX112) (SX111) (SX112)
h
!i:.l ll. I
I t
I i
I~ I
I~ Chuck Unclamp Confirm Area
Chuck Over Clamp Confirm Area
2 : Left chuck proximity sensor SX23, SX24: Right chuck proximity sensor
In inward mode, the status of chuck will be detected in 3 ways according to the
operation status of each sensor.
Main chuck SX11 SX12

Rignt chuck SX23 SX24
Clamp status OFF OFF
UnCiamp status OFF ON
Over clamp status ON OFF
Alarm status ON ON
In above status, if SX11(SX23) is "ON" or both sensors are "ON", alarm will occur and the
machine cannot be operated normally.
In case of changing workpiece, it is required to adjust the location of sensors.
OPERATION I 103
C2) Outward mode (OD mode)
~\ ~ Chuck Over Clamp Confirm Area

Chuck Clamp Confirm Area Chuck Unclamp Confirm Area
;Main chuck proximity sensor SX23, SX24: Rignt chuck proximity sensor
In outward mode, the status of chuck will be detected in 3 ways according to the
operation status of each sensor.
Main chuck SX11 SX12

Rignt chuck SX23 SX24
Clamp status OFF OFF
UnCiamp status OFF ON
Over clamp status ON OFF
Alarm status ON
In above status, if SX11 (SX23) is "ON" or both sensors are "ON", alarm will occur and the
machine cannot be operated normally.
In case of changing workpiece, it is required to adjust the location of sensors
104 I Part2
11.4 Chuck clamp/unclamp operation
Chuck clamp/unclamp is possible in both of manual and automatic mode.
If chuck is clamped, then the lamp in lower side of operation panel shown below will be ON
and if undamped, the lamp will be OFF.
LEFT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
[(]110~
..r--v
L
~
(1) Manual operation
1) If the machine satisfies the conditions listed below, the chuck can be operated in
manual.
-The machine is in 'Machine Ready' status.
-Not in automatic operation regardless of machine mode.
(However, chuck can be clamped/ undamped in manual during MOO/M01 executing.)
- Spindle is stop.
2) Chuck clamp/unclamp manual operation

Chuck can be operated by using foot switch
where the symbol shown in right side is
attached among various switches located at
the lower part of machine as shown in left
side figure.
If the pedal in corresponding foot switch is pressed when the manual mode is valid,
clamped chuck will be undamped and undamped chuck will be clamped.
OPERATION I 105
(2) Automatic operation
1) Automatic operation is valid
If the machine satisfies the conditions listed below, the chuck can be operated
automatically.
- The machine is in 'Machine Ready' status.
- Automatic operation is possible to be executed
-Spindle is stop.
(However, in case of commanding M31 or M 131, automatic operation of chuck is valid
regardless of spindle rotation.)
2) Automatic operation
Chuck will operate if M-eade listed below is commanded when automatic operation is
valid. Regarding the finishing method of commanded M-eade, refer to "10.3 Chuck
clamp/unclamp check".
Finishing method of M-eade

M-eade description K7.6= 1 K7.6 =0
Timer Inward Outward
M68 Main chuck clamp TM30 TM30, SX11 & SX12 "OFF" TM30,SX11 &SX12"0FF"
M69 Main chuck unclamp TM40 SX12 "ON" & SX11 "OFF" SX11 "ON"&SX12"0FF"
TM130, SX111 & SX112 TM130, SX11 & SX12
M168 Right chuck clamp TM130
"OFF" "OFF"
M169 Right chuck unclamp TM140 SX112 "ON", SX111 "OFF" SX111 "ON", SX112 "OFF"
106 I Part 2
11.5 Dual chucking (option)
According to the requirement, when chuck is clamped, the pressure can be changed in 2
levels.
(1) Command method

By commanding M-eade, the pressure when chuck is clamped or undamped can be
changed. However, dual chucking operation in different system cannot be executed
Chucking pressure can be changed

in 2 level, and changed by M-
eade listed below.
M66(M166); LEFT(RIGHT)
Chuck low pressure
M67(M167); LEFT(RIGHT)
Chuck high pressure
Unclamp chuck Finish M67
chanqed into Low
Commanded M-eade will be finished after time set in PMC timer listed below elapsed,
and then automatic command can be executed.
TM31 (TM131) (Setting unit: msec)

In case of change pressure from high to low, the pressure is not changed instantly after
commanding M-eade. Surely unclamp chuck once and clamp chuck, then the pressure
will be changed into low.
According to the clamp pressure of chuck in clamp status, chucking lamp in operation
panel will be operated as follows.
OPERATION I 107
LEFT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
Low pressure ; flickering
Left chuck clamp
a~O~
~
[0] High pressure ;ON
RIGHT CHUCK
MODE SELECT
Low Pressure ; flickering
Right chuck
wOlD
~
[§1] High Pressure ;ON
The setting of actual pressure in low and high pressure can be adjusted using chucking
pressure change valve that is attached at the front of machine. The setting pressure will be
upped by rotating the knob of valve in CW direction and downed in CCW direction.
In general, the setting pressure is set as follows at shipping. According to the machine type,
setting pressure may be differ.
2
- Low pressure : 5kgf/cm
2
-High pressure : 20- 25 kgf/cm
(2) Operation restrictions in dual chucking according to the setting of keep relay
According to the setting of keep relay, operation status of chucking would be changed
If M-code that changes chucking pressure is commanded,

rotating spindle will stop and be changed into feed hold status.
Set to "0" And alarm 2366 occurs.
Alarm 2366 will be cleared by unclamping in manual. Automatic
K0.5
operation can be restarted after clamping again.
If M-code that changes chucking pressure is commanded,
Set to "1" rotating spindle isn't stop. And the machine will keep on
operation without stop and any occurrence of alarm
After ON the machine power, it is possible to command spindle
Set to "0" rotation automatically without M-code command related to
chucking pressure change.
After ON the machine power, if spindle rotation is commanded
K2.6 automatically without M-code command related to chucking
pressure change, alarm 2128 will occur. After ON the machine
Set to "1"
power, surely command once M-code related to chucking
pressure change. After this, spindle rotation can be commanded
normally.
Keep relay shown above is initiate to "0" before shipping.
108 I Part 2
11.6 Chucking operation on spindle rotating
In case that spindle is rotating, basically chuck cannot be operated. But for the special
cases, using following M-eade, chuck can be operated during spindle rotation in automatic
operation only.
- M31 ; Left spindle interlock bypass M-eade

- M131 ; Right spindle interlock bypass M-eade
The operation of M-eade listed above is valid only in automatic

mode shown in right side. It can be used as follows.
1) Clamp corresponding chuck.

2) Command corresponding M-eade according to the chuck that want to be operated
during spindle rotation.
3) Unclamp corresponding chuck.
4) In case of commanding corresponding spindle rotation, spindle will rotate normally
even if the chuck is undamped
5) And then this status will be released by chuck clamp command. After this, chuck
can not be operated during spindle rotation.
In addition, above status will be released in cases as follows, after this, forwarding/
reversing command are impossible during spindle rotation.
- M02, M30 is commanded.
- In case of pressing NC reset switch in MDI operation panel beside the LCD monitor.
11.7 PMC alarm related to chucking

Alarm listed below may occur relating to the chucking.
Alarm Description Level

2090 Chucking status abnormal Cycle stop alarm
2091 Chucking M-eade operation time over Cycle stop alarm
2102 Chuck is undamped during spindle rotation Cycle stop alarm
2128 Omitted chucking pressure command before spindle rotation Cycle stop alarm
2189 Chucking detect sensor abnormal Single block alarm
2360 Chuck is undamped Message alarm
2366 Chucking pressure is changed Message alarm
OPERATION I 109
12. Tool post
Tool post is the device to attach a few tools, and to change tool used in machining.
In general, according to the number of tools, tool post is classified as follows.
Classification Octagonal tool post Enable to attach 8 pieces of tools

according to the Decagonal tool post Enable to attach 10 pieces of tools
number of tools to Dodecagonal tool post Enable to attach 12 pieces of tools
be attached 24th tool post Enable to attach 24 pieces of tools
According to the machine type, the number of tools are already decided.
Regarding the more details, refer to manual for machine specification.
Turret is basically clamped/ undamped by hydraulic pressure, and in order to change tool, it
is rotated by servo motor during rotation.
12.1 The movement of tool post

In case of commanding tool index, generally tool post will
operate as sequence shown in left figure.
In order to rotate turret, be sure to check whether turret is
undamped or not and then rotate turret.
Regarding the turret which milling tool can be attached to, it
will rotate after the status of milling tool is checked.
If the status of milling tool is impossible to rotate operation
turret, the status of tool will be changed automatically and
then turret will start to rotate.
In case of manual rotation of turret, the rotating direction
should be determined in advance.
However, in case of automatic rotation of turret, it will rotate
automatically by means of turret servo drive which judges a
short distance.
The rotating direction of turret is also determined
compulsorily using M-eade in automatic mode.
110 I Part 2
12.2 The operation of tool post
Turret index can be commanded in manual and automatically.
Turret can be indexed after the machine satisfies the condition as follows.
- Machine ready status

- The front door is closed

c:::::::J [Turret Selection Mode]
~
Select turret to want to index.
=
1
c=::::) Press I~WEi I button to select the upper turret.
LOWER =
0~ Press ~ button to select the lower turret.
c:::::::J c:::::::::)
[!][~ HANDLE AXIS SELECT [Selecting manual mode]

2 Change the machine mode into manual mode by
pressing the switch shown in left side.
[Setting the target tool number]

To set the target tool number, push the turret
3 station setting I@ I l @ I button. Then target tool

No. will be changed. And then target tool number is
flickering.
[Checking index direction interference]
4 Check whether the interference occurs or not in the
rotating direction of turret.
[Starting index]
Press the turret index ~ button, then turret will

rotate to target tool number at a time.
5 If you want to rotate by one station of turrent ,
press and release the ~ with I @ I or I @ I

button at the same time, then turret will be rotate
by one station of turret.
OPERATION I 111
Q TOOLNO. [Current number display]
I~
Currently clamped number is displayed after
completing rotation and clamping of turret.

T-code will be used in order to change tool wanted in automatic operation.
1) T -code command enable mode
In order to validate T-code command, the mode shown below should be selected in
the machine.
c=::J c=::J
~[!]
2) T -code command
T-code is commanded in the same form in upper and lower unit, and can be
commanded in the same block with M-eade, S-code and axis traverse command.
D.D. : Command tool no.
T D.D. D D ;
o o : Command offset no.
-Example~ If T-code is commanded, turret will rotate into specified tool no.
and apply offset.
- T0807 ; Indexing to tool no. 8 and apply offset of no. 7 to coordinate system.
3) If T-code is commanded, turret will be indexed after completing unclamp. But

according to the operator, the indexing can be operated to be distinguish by the
command of turret unclamp M-code(M215).
Example ; In case of commanding Tool No. 8 from the reference point
M215; (Turret unclamp)
G28 UO WO; (X, Z-axis reference point return)
T0800; (Tool change)
I&CAUTIONI
1. M215 (Turret unclamp) is available in auto mode. If in manual mode or door opens or
the reset switch is pressed or in optional stop mode, turret will be clamped
automatically.
2. If cut feed is commanded in turret unclamp state, alarm 2075 will occur and turret will
be clamped.
4) Rotating direction command of turret
112 I Part 2
In case that turret is indexed by T-code command, turret will be rotated in direction
of the short distance automatically.
But in case of using M-eade as follows, turret can be rotated in the direction
specified.
M-eade listed below is commanded in same block with T-code or previous block with
T-code.
Rotating direction M-eade commanded once is valid in only one T-code. In case of
commanding T-code again after turret rotating, turret will be rotates in the direction
of the short distance normally. And rotating direction determination function by M-
eade is only valid in automatic mode.
M180; Specified the rotating direction of turret to CW direction.

M181 ; Specified the rotating direction of turret to CCW direction.
Example ____, Current tool no. is 5.
In order to index into tool no. 6,

turret should be rotated in the CCW
M180
® direction of the short distance. But it
T0606;
is rotated in CW direction by M180
command.
Specify rotating direction to CCW
M181 ;
direction.
In order to index into tool no. 5
again, turret should be rotated in the
@ T0505; CW direction of the short distance.
But it is rotated in CCW direction by
M181 command.
Turret is rotated in the CW direction
© T0404;
of the short distance normally.
Above M-eade can be used in case that interference occurs when special tool
attached to tool holder and turret is rotated in the specific direction.
OPERATION I 113
5) Offset cancel using T-code
6) In case of using T-code as follows, offset applied to current coordinate system can
be cancelled.
- TOOOO ; Turret isn't rotated and current offset applied is cancelled.
(According to the keep relay setting as follows, TOOOO would be treated as alarm.)
Set to "0" By commanding TOOOO, alarm occurs and the machine stops.
K10.1 By commanding TOOOO, offset is canceled and the operation keeps
Set to "1"
on.
- T LLOO ; Turret is rotated into specified tool no. but offset is cancelled.
(LL: command tool no.)
12.3 Tool life management (option)

Tool life management is option function and can be used only in case of special request.
The most basic items is described in below.
Regarding the more details, refer to "FANUC OPERATOR'S MANUAL".
(1) Summary of function

Register several tools as one group and set the lifetime (number of times or time) that
tool can be used. If tool registered in group is over the lifetime, then the next registered
tool will be used automatically.
In machining program, simply command group number in T-code.
Above function can be used in order to manage tool effectively in automation
equipment that has much tool consumption or where the machining is executed
continuously.
(2) Setting method of tool group

c:::::::J
~ II ~
~
c:::::::J
MDI
I
At first, set the tool group in order to use tool life management
function.
Change the machine mode into automatic mode as shown in left
side. After that, to execute program as follows will set the tool group.
In general, in case that the number of tool isn't appended additionally, 16 groups and 16
tools can be registered and used. The combination can be done by modification of
parameter.
114 I Part 2
0 ----' Program No.
G10 L3; Start to register tool life data
p P ___ :Group No., L ____ : Life (generally using times)
--- L ----'
T - - - - T____ Tool & offset no. that will be registered in the group no.above
p P ___ :Group No., L ____ : Life (generally using times)

--- L ----'
G11 ; Finish to register tool life data

M02 (M30); Program end
(3) Using method of registered tool group

Registered tool can be used by commanding T-code in machining program.
TLL99 ; Turret is indexed to tool no. & offset in specified group.
(LL: command group no.)
TLL88 ; Cancel offset applied by tool in specified group.

(LL: command group no.)
(4) NC screen operation for tool life management

If tool life management is applied, NC screen for operation the function will be displayed
as follows.
1) Screen display method
SELECTED GROUP: Press "OFFSET SETTING" switch

GROUP 001 LIFE 0150 COUHT 0002
*0101 @0202 0303 among switches as follows in MDI
operation panel beside LCD monitor.
GROUP 002 LIFE OU50 COUHT 0000
0606 0707 0909
TO BE CHAHGED
--Press soft switch in the lower side of

~=~==~=~=~=~~ LCD monitor until "TOOLLF" is
displayed in soft menu [B
-If "TOOLLF" soft switch is pressed,
then above screen will displayed.
OPERATION I 115
2) Example of group registering
After editing example program and executing, it can be checked that the groups are
registered in tool life management NC screen as follows.
G10 L3 ; Start to register group
P1 L 150 ; Register group no. 1, life 150 times SELECTED GROUP: •••
,K GROUP mu LIFE 0150 COUI-H 0000
T0101
T0202
; Register tool no. 1, offset no. 1

l .. v 0101 0202 0303
T0303 ; Register tool no. 3, offset no. 3 / GROUP 002 LIFE 0050 COUHT 0000
0606 0707 0909
P2 L50
T0606
; Register group no. 2, life 50 times

I"
I lit
TO BE CHAHGED :
s B L m
T0707 ; Register tool no. 7, offset no. 7 llr MDI • -·· 11 11 11
T0909 ; Register tool no. 9, offset no. 9
G11 ; End of group registering lr RO ll II tmu~~~oPRnll g - ~

OPR
M30 ; Program end
3) Example of actual usage

Edit and execute the following program, then the program will be executed as
follows.
Example program
T0199 Index and use the tool registered in group no. 1.
T0198 Cancel the applied offset of tool registered in group no. 1.
T0404 Index to tool no. 4, apply offset of offset no. 4.
M30 Count the using times of used tool, that is registered in group no. 1, by one
If program above is executed at the first

time, tool no. 1 is indexed in "T0199",
value counted will be increased by 1
whenever M30 is executed.
If the value counted reaches to 150 by SELECTED GROUP: •••

GROUP 001 LIFE 0150 COUHT 0002
executing the program 150 times, then
* 0101 @0202 0303
"*" will be displayed beside "0101". "*"
means that the tool is completed to use. LIFE 0050 COUHT 0000
0707 0909
After that, if program is executed, no. 2 is

indexed in "T0199", the value will be
increased by one whenever M30 is
executed. At this time, "@" will be
116 I Part 2
displayed beside "0202". "@" means that
the tool is currently using.
The program is kept on executing until the last tool no. 3 registered in group no. 1 is
used in 150 times, after that, the alarm occurs. The machine doesn't execute
automatic operation until the alarm is released.
The alarm will be released by clearing the data counted.
The data such as counted value, completed to use(*)and in use (@) etc. can be
cleared by operation as follows.
Counted value and some mark will be cleared by pressing soft switch in sequence of
(OPRT) soft switch oE "CLEAR" oE "EXEC".
And each of marks means as follows.
* : Tool is completed to use and finished its life.
# : Tool is cancelled to use and not finished its life.
@ : Currently using tool.
12.4 Alarm related to tool

Related to tool, alarms may occur as follows
ALARM CONTENT LEVEL

2105 REV. SPINDLE OVERLOAD alarm occurs. Cycle stop alarm
2116 REV. SPINDLE FIX/UNFIX sensor is abnormal Cycle stop alarm
2118 Turret clamp confirm sensor is abnormal. Cycle stop alarm
2119 TOOL index operation time has exceeded. Cycle stop alarm
2120 TOOL index command alarm. Cycle stop alarm
Cutting feed is commanded under the turret unclamp
2122 Cycle stop alarm
state.
TOOL index has been commanded in TURRET
interference domain.
2124 Servo turret LED is abnormal. Cycle stop alarm
2170 The tool in use has reached the usage limit. Single Block alarm
Regarding the more details related to alarm, refer to "Maintenance" part.
OPERATION I 117
13. Coolant operation
Coolant used in the machine can be used by means of operation as follows.
13.1 Connecting coolant motor and peripheral device

In general, coolant motor, pressure switch and oil skimmer etc. are attached to coolant tank.
Connectors for fitting related to coolant are prepared as follows in the lateral side of
electrical control cabinet. More detail explanation, refer to the electric diagram.
Classification Ca II lOCO spec. i1 box WirgNo. Ski/QX
Coolant motor for upper MS3102A 18-10S WM41 Standard
Coolant motor for lower MS3102A 18-10S WM141 Standard
Coolant flushing motor for upper MS3102A 18-10S WM42 Standard
Coolant flushing motor for lower MS3102A 18-10S WM142 Standard
Coolant motor( Cool jet) for upper MS3102A 24-11S WM44 Option
Coolant motor( Cool jet) for lower MS3102A 24-11S WM144 Option
Through spindle coolant motor MS3102A 18-10S WM43 Option
Coolant pressure for upper MS31 02A 18-4S WC41B Option
Coolant pressure for lower MS3102A 18-4S WC141B Option
Oil skimmer MS31 02A 18-9S WM75 Option
Optional coolant motor and Cool-Jet motor cannot be attached simultaneously.
118 I Part 2
13.2 Standard coolant operation
Standard coolant can be manually operated using the switch in operation panel as follows.
The operation method is same with upper and lower unit.
(1) Standard coolant manual operation

CD Coolant "ON"
[Conditions for coolant operation]
Check the status of machine satisfies the conditions
as follows.
1
-The machine is in machine ready status.
- The front door is closed.
- The status that coolant pressure alarm isn't occurred.
[Coolant "ON" command]
Press the start switch shown in left side, then
c:::::::::) c:::::::::)
~~
coolant is outgoing and the lamp in switch will be
2
ON.
o!f Check the lamp in stop switch shown in left side is
OFF. If not, press switch and then OFF the lamp.
~ Coolant "OFF"
[Coolant "OFF" command]

The lamp in start switch shown in left side will be
c:::::::::) c:::::::::)
~~
OFF.
1
o!f Press the stop switch shown in left side, then the
lamp in switch is ON and coolant stops.
Beside the cases above, in case of emergency stop of machine, coolant will stop.
And in case of opening the front door, coolant will stop but if the front door is closed
again, then coolant will be operated again without additional command.
OPERATION I 119
(2) General coolant automatic operation
Operate coolant using M-eade as follows. When use coolant with spindle rotation, then
use multi m-eade system like below.
MOB ; Coolant "ON"
M09 ; Coolant "OFF"
M03 S_ P11 MOB ; Coolant "ON" & LEFT spindle forward rotation
M04 S_ P11 MOB ; Coolant "ON" & LEFT spindle reverse rotation
M05 P11 M09 ; Coolant "OFF" & LEFT spindle stop
M03 S_ P21 MOB ; Coolant "ON" & RIGHT spindle forward rotation
M03 S_ P21 MOB ; Coolant "ON" & RIGHT spindle reverse rotation
M05 P21 M09 ; Coolant "OFF" & RIGHT spindle stop
In order to execute M-eade listed above, the machine should be in the status as follows.

-Automatic operation is possible.
-The front door is closed.
-Coolant pressure alarm has not occurred.
-All LEOs in coolant operation switch on the left are OFF. If not,
turn the LED OFF by pressing the corresponding switch.
After commanding M-eade, the conditions for finishing M-eade that is commanded are
as follows.
And the finishing conditions of M-eade can be modified according to the keep relay setting.
M-eade will be finished after commanding regardless of

Set to "0"
K3.6 operation of actual motor.
Set to "1" M-eade will not be finished unless the actual motor is operated.
In case that K3.6 is set to "0" and coolant operation is commanded in M-eade, if the
lamp in coolant stop switch is ON, then actual coolant will not be operated.
However, because commanded M-eade is valid, coolant will be operated if stop status
is released by pressing stop switch again.
K3.6 ="0" K3.6 ="1"

M08 Finished right after commanding Finished after coolant operation
M09 Finished after coolant stop Finished after coolant stop
120 I Part 2
I&CAUTIONI
1. In case of commanding M09 and axis traverse in same block, after finishing axis
traversing, then M09 is executed and coolant will stop.
(3) Stop operation and restarting of general coolant

Coolant in operating can be stopped by M-eade or stop switch in operation panel.
However, coolant can be also stopped by operation as follows.
-Emergency stop of machine.
- Press NC reset switch in MDI operation panel beside LCD monitor.
- Command M02 I M30.
-Command MOO I M01.
(Coolant stopped by MOO I M01 will be restarted when automatic operation is restarted.)
OPERATION I 121
13.3 Coolant flushing operation
In order to operate optional coolant, the machine should satisfy all of the conditions listed
below.
-Machine ready status.

c:::::::::>
- The front door is closed.
~ -All of the lamps in coolant operation switches shown in left side
L.i[J are OFF.
(If not, OFF the lamp by pressing corresponding switch. However,
this restriction is only valid when K3.5 is set to "1".)
(1) Manual operationof optional coolant

Manual operation of optional coolant can be operated according to the keep relay set-
ting.
Manual operation of optional coolant cannot be operated by coolant

Set to "0"
operation switch in operation panel.
K3.5
Manual operation of optional coolant can be operated by coolant
Set to "1"
operation switch in operation panel.
If K3.5 is set to "1", then optional coolant can be operated by operating switch in the same
way with manual operation method of general coolant motor.
(2) Automatic operation of optional coolant

Coolant can be operated using M-eade listed below.
M138; Coolant flushing "ON"
M139; Coolant flushing "OFF"
According to the setting of K3.6, the finishing method of M-eade above is classified, with the
same way of general coolant, as follows,
K3.6 ="0" K3.6 ="1"
Finished after commanding without
M138 Finished after coolant operation
operating confirmation
M139 Finished after coolant stop Finished after coolant stop
(3) Stop operation and restarting of optional coolant

Coolant in operating can be stopped by M-eade or stop switch in operation panel.
However, coolant can be also stopped by operation as follows.
- Emergency stop of machine.
-Command MOO I M01.
122 I Part2
13.4 Cool jet coolant operation

First, Keep Relay settings shown below must be set to "1".
Set to "0" Cool Jet motor is not used.
K6.4
Set to "1" Cool Jet motor is used.
Regardless of actual motor operation, M-eade finished after

Set to "0"
K3.6 command.
Set to "1" Actual motor must operate for M-eade to finish.
(1) Cool Jet operation

Cool Jet is only possible to do automatic command using the M-eade listed below.
M07 ; Optional coolant or Cool Jet "ON"
M09 ; Optional coolant or Cool Jet "OFF"
CD Operate standard coolant (Automatic or manual command)
At this time, the LED of coolant operation switch in operation panel is flickering.
® Command M07.
@ Cool jet motor will be operated 1 second after command is given.
At this time, the LED of coolant operation switch in operation panel is ON.
I&CAUTIONI
Cool jet operates only when standard coolant is operating. Be sure to command cool
jet when standard coolant is operating.
(2) Cool Jet Coolant stop operation and restarting

Beside commanding M09, cool jet and standard coolant will also stop in cases below.
-Emergency stop of machine.
- Command M021M30
-Command M021M01
OPERATION I 123
13.5 Mutual operation between standard coolant and cool jet coolant
Basically, standard and cool jet coolant can be automatically commanded independently
and both coolants commonly use "M09" as stop command.
In case of setting keep relay to "1", only one coolant between both coolants is possible to do
automatic command. If a coolant is commanded when another coolant is in operation,
coolant in operating will stop and newly commanded coolant will be operated.
Independent command of standard coolant and optional coolant is
possible.
Example)
Set to "0
M08 ; standard Coolant "ON"
M07 ; option Cool Jet Coolant "ON"
M09 ; standard & option Cool Jet Coolant "OFF"
K4.2 Only one coolant between standard and optional coolant can be
commanded.
Example)
Set to "1 M08 ; standard Coolant "ON"
M07 ; option Cool Jet Coolant "ON" & standard Coolant "OFF"
M08 ; standard Coolant "ON" & option Cool Jet Coolant "OFF"
M09 ; standard Coolant "OFF"
124 I Part 2
13.6 T.S.C (Through the spindle coolant) operation
In order to operate T.S.C, the machine must be satisfied all of the conditions listed below.
- Machine ready state
- The front door close
(1) Automatic operation of T.S.C (Through the spindle coolant)

Regardless of upper or lower unit, coolant can be operated using M-eade as follows.
M108 ; Through the Spindle Coolant "ON"
M109 ; Through the Spindle Coolant "OFF"
The end method of M-eade above is same with general coolant and is classified as fol-
lows according to the setting state of K3.6.
K3.6 ="0" K3.6 ="1"
End after command without confirmation
M108 End after coolant operation
of operation.
M109 End after coolant stop End after coolant stop
(2) Stop and restart operation of T.S.C

T.S.C can be stopped using M-eade above or switch on operation panel. And it can be
also stopped using the method listed below.
- Set the machine into emergency stop state

- Press NC reset switch on MDI operation panel beside of LCD monitor.
-Command M02 I M30.
-Command MOO I M01.
(The coolant stopped by MOOIM01 command will be restarted basically when
the automatic operation is restarted)
- Set the machine into emergency stop state

- Press NC reset switch on MDI operation panel beside of LCD monitor.
-Command MOO I M01.
(The coolant stopped by MOOIM01 command will be restarted basically when
the automatic operation is restarted)
OPERATION I 125
13.7 Keep relay related to coolant
Set to "0" Coolant pressure sensor is not used.
K0.4
Set to "1" Coolant pressure sensor is used.
Coolant flushing cannot be operated manually with coolant

Set to "0"
operating switch in operation panel.
K3.5
Coolant flushing can be operated manually with coolant operating
Set to "1"
switch in operation panel.
Regardless of actual motor operation, M-eade finished after
Set to "0"
K3.6 command.
Set to "1" Actual motor must operate for M-eade to finish.
Independent command of standard coolant and optional coolant is

possible.
Set to "0" Example) M08; standard Coolant "ON"
M07 ; option Cool Jet Coolant "ON"
M09 ; standard & option Cool Jet Coolant "OFF"
Only one coolant could be operated between standard and optional
K4.2
coolant
Example)
Set to "1" M08 ; standard Coolant "ON"
M07 ; option Cool Jet Coolant "ON" & standard Coolant "OFF"
M08 ; standard Coolant "ON" & option Cool Jet Coolant "OFF"
M09 ; standard Coolant "OFF"
Set to "0" Cool Jet motor is not used.
K6.4
Set to "1" Cool Jet motor is used.
13.8 Alarm related to coolant

Related to the coolant, the following alarm may occur
Alarm Content Level
2166 Coolant filter change alarm Single block alarm
2168 Coolant low pressure alarm Single block alarm
2169 Cooljet low pressure alarm Single block alarm
2183 Coolant level low alarm Single block alarm
Regarding the more details alarm, refer to "Maintenance".
126 I Part 2
14. Quick tool presetter {Option)
This is the device to measure the wearing of tool by means of touch sensor that contacts
directly with tool, and to change the offset of tool simply.
[UPPER TOUCH SENSOR] [UPPER TOUCH SENSOR]
~dime~
~'
~ ~dicec,.on
.- . ~-.... ~" ""~~'""
- ~ ---..=-
t -X
_ _
d1ract1on
t- X dicec<ion
[LC>VVER T O U C H S E N S O R ]
[LC>VVER TOUCH SENSOR]
In general, quick tool presetter consists of touch sensor, Q-setter arm and arm position
detect proximity sensor. Q-setter is operate by the motor which inside of arm, And according
to the operation method of arm, it is classified as follows.
- Manual type : Arm is operated by operator.
Thus, arm cannot be upped or downed by manual operation switch or M-
eade.
-Automatic type : Arm is operated by motor.
Thus, arm can be upped or downed by manual operation switch or M-eade.
OPERATION I 127
14.1 Automatic type quick tool presetter operation
[Manual mode selection]

0REF W!vfil
rvv
JOG
Change the machine mode into manual mode by
pressing the switch among the switches shown in left
HANDLE AXIS SELECT side.
[iJ ~{@).
- Reference point return mode
-Jog mode
- handle mode
[Check whether the machine has interference or

not]
2
Check whether collision is occurred or not when quick
tool presetter is downed.
[Arm down]
Press the switch in operation panel, shown in left
side, then quick tool presetter will be downed and can
input the offset of tool.
3 i§lu
QUICK
SETTER [Arm up]
Press the switch again in operation panel, shown in
left side, then quick tool presetter will be upped and
be fixed to cover of machine.

Command M-eade listed below regardless of upper or lower unit selection, then quick
tool presetter will be downed or upped. Before commanding, be sure to check whether
the interference or collision are occurred or not by executing the command.
M76 ; Quick tool presetter swing arm up.
M77 ; Quick tool presetter swing arm down.
(3) Restrictions before commanding

In following cases, operation will not be occurred by commanding.
1) In case that down command cannot be done
- Spindle is in rotating
- Parts unloader(B) being advanced
- X1, Z1, X2 and Z2-axis aren't in reference point.
2) n case that up command cannot be done
128 I Part 2
- Spindle is in rotating
- In case that touch sensor is operated
(4) Restrictions in case that quick tool presetter is downed

In case that quick tool presetter is downed, restrictions in machine operation will be
occurred as follows.
- Cannot rotate spindle.
- Cannot do manual reference point return and rapid traverse of axis.
-Feed rate of axis jog will be limited by 1Omm/min.
-A-axis cannot be fed.
-Work ejector and Parts unloader(B) cannot be operated.
14.2 Manual type quick tool presetter operation

(1) Operation method
Operator must install arm of quick tool presetter and use it.
However, in case of operation as follows, alarm will occur.
- In case of starting automatic operation when the arm is installed or being installed arm
during automatic operation.
- In case of installing arm during spindle rotating in manual mode.
(2) Restrictions in case that quick tool presetter is installed

Restrictions in case that quick tool presetter is installed are same as automatic type
generally.
OPERATION I 129
14.3 In case of using quick tool presetter by manual operation
(1) Down the quick tool presetter
-
If quick tool presetter is downed and the
OFF SET /GEOMET RY 0000 1 NOOOOO
NO. z. R T mode is changed into manual mode, then
G 00 1 l . 000 0. 000 0
G 00 2 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0 offset screen will be displayed automatically as
G 003 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0
shown in left side.
G 00 4 l. 486 0.000 0. 000 0
G 005 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0 At this time, the cursor will be moved to the
G 006 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0
G 007 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0 offset no. that is same with current tool no.
G 008 l. 486 -4 9.56 1 0. 000 0
ACTUAL POS ITION (RELATIVE ) automatically.
u 1 0 l . 000 N 2 02.09 4
In some machines, in case that quick tool
:>
JOG ww ...... 7r1 . 6 : 05:5 9 presetter is downed and the axis is traversed,
[ WEAR l [ ll!ll!Ia ] [ l"IORK ] [ l [ (OPRT ) l
the screen would be changed and offset no.
would be commanded automatically.
(2) Selecting tool that wants to change offset

By rotating turret, select the tool that wants to change offset.
(3) Changing offset
-X Direction After determining axis for offset change and

corresponding direction, move axis to make
contact with touch sensor. If tool is in
- Z Direction
contact with sensor, axis will stop its
traversing, LED on the middle of the sensor
turns ON, and the value of the current offset
no. changes. At this time, axis cannot be
traversed any more in the direction tha axis
was traversed. After completing the offset
change, traverse the axis in the opposite
direction and pull the axis out of sensor.
130 I Part 2
14.4 Keep relay and parameter related to quick tool presetter
Regarding quick tool presetter, keep relay is available to set as follows.
Set to "0" Auto quick tool presetter isn't attached to the machine.
K7.5
Set to "1" Auto quick tool presetter is attached to the machine.
X1, Z1-axis jog speed when quick tool presetter is downed.

D465 Set to "20"
(unit : mm/min)
X2, Z2-axis jog speed when quick tool presetter is downed.
D475 Set to "20"
(unit : mm/min)
In case that screen change to offset screen as quick tool

Set to "0" presetter is downed, cursor doesn't move to the offset no.
which is same with current tool no. automatically.
5005.#5
In case that screen change to offset screen as quick tool
Set to "1" presetter is downed, cursor moves to the offset no. which is
same with current tool no. automatically.
I illCAUTION I
1. Jog speed set in D465 and D475 will be used to maintain its low speed when tool will
contact with touch sensor of quick tool presetter. In case of arbitrary modifying, it will
influence on the precision of offset changing value. Do not change its value arbitrarily.
14.5 Alarm related to quick tool presetter

Regarding the quick tool presetter, alarm may occur as follows.
Alarm Content Level
Quick tool presetter operation time over or operation
2101 Feed hold alarm
condition abnormal.
The status of quick tool presetter arm detect proximity
2362 Message alarm
sensor is abnormal.
2389 Sensing alarm Message alarm
Regarding the more details, refer to "Maintenance".
I~CAUTIONI
1. Do not operate Q-setter manualy by hands. It can cause braking
OPERATION I 131
15. Parts catcher(A) & conveyor {Option)
Parts catcher(A) is the device to receive the machining completed workpiece by means of
Parts catcher(A) pocket, to present the workpiece into loading bucket which is attached in
the front of parts conveyor or machine.
This device shown above is mainly used in case of automatic discharging of workpiece.
Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor are optional device and parts conveyor is operated to
connect with Parts catcher(A).
Parts catcher(A) is operated by HYD. pressure and parts conveyor is operated by electrical
motor.
Parts Catcher(A) Arm
Parts Catcher(A) Pocket
Parts Conveyor
Conveyor Motor
132 I Part 2
15.1 Parts catcher(A) operation
Parts catcher(A) can be operated not by manual operation but by automatic operation
using M-eade listed below.
M10; Parts catcher(A) advance
M11 ; Parts catcher(A) retract
1) Finishing condition of M10

M10 will be finished when retract confirm sensor is OFF and then the time set in PMC
timer elapsed. After this, automatic operation will be continued.
TM16 ; Parts catcher(A) advance operation time (unit : msec)
M11 will be finished when retract confirm sensor is ON. After this, automatic operation
will be continued.
I illCAUTION I
1. When Parts catcher(A) is in advance status, manual rapid traverse will be limited.
15.2 Parts conveyor operation

Parts conveyor doesn't require any operation command. If M11 is commanded, parts con-
veyor will stop automatically after the time elapsed.
TM18 ; Parts conveyor operation time (unit : msec)
According the operation status, set the proper time in operation time. In case of stopping
conveyor in operating before the time elapsed, press emergency stop switch.
OPERATION I 133
15.3 Parts catcher(A) and conveyor operation
Command M10 Command M11
Parts Catcher(A) retract and

Parts Catcher(A) advance 1
_ ____,
parts conveyor operate
Is time set in NO
TM16 elapsed
and is retract
Load workpiece on loading

YES bucket or oarts convevor
Command M69
Parts Conveyor operate
Chuck unclamp
Work ejector operating is

added if needed. (option)
Machining completed
Parts conveyor stop
workpiece will be loaded on
134 I Part2
15.4 Keep relay and parameter related to Parts catcher(A) and parts
conveyor
Keep relay can set as follows related to Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor.
Parts catcher( A) and parts conveyor aren't attached in the
Set to "0"
K8.5 machine.
Set to "1" Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor are attached in the machine.
Set the operation time of parts conveyor after commanding M11.

TM18
(setting unit : msec)
Set the operation time of Parts catcher(A) after commanding
TM16
M1 0. (setting unit : msec)
I illCAUTION I
1. Set the proper time in TM 18 according to the status of operation.
2. Set TM 16 with consideration of time elapsed for forwarding of Parts catcher(A). In case of
setting the time too short, it may cause the malfunction of machine.
15.5 Alarm related to Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor

Related to Parts catcher(A) and parts conveyor, alarm can occur as follows.
Alarm Content Level
2095 Parts catcher(A) operation time over. Cycle stop alarm
OPERATION I 135
16. Parts unloader(B) & conveyor {Option)
Parts unloader(B) is the device to receive the machining completed workpiece by means of
Parts unloader(B) pocket, to present the workpiece into loading bucket which is attached in
the front of parts conveyor or machine.
This device shown above is mainly used in case of automatic discharging of workpiece.
Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor are optional device and parts conveyor is operated to
connect with Parts unloader(B).
Parts unloader(B) is operated by air pressure and parts conveyor is operated by electrical
motor.
136 I Part 2
16.1 Parts unloader(B) operation
Parts unloader(B) can be operated not by manual operation but by automatic operation.
And it can be operated in sole operation or continuous operation using M-eade listed
below. In case of sole operation, upper and lower unit use the same M-eade and in
case of continuous operation, upper and lower unit use M-eade listed below according
to the position where the parts are received.
M186; Part unloader(B) interlock on (Only in the upper unit)
M187; Part unloader(B) interlock cancel (Only in the upper unit)
M380 ; Stopper Return
M381 ; Stopper Advance
M382 ; Body advance
M383; Body return
M384 ; Bucket advance
M385 ; Bucket return
M386 ; Arm down
M387 ; Arm return
M210; Parts unloader(B) Body advance to left side (TT2025)
M310; Parts unloader(B) Body advance to right side
M288; Parts unloader(B) down to chuck (TT1518)
M10; Parts unloader(B) down to chuck (TT2025)
M11 ; Parts unloader(B) receive return (Continuous operation) for TT2025
M12; Parts unloader(B) receive return (Continuous operation)forTT1518
1) Finishing condition of M31 0

The continuous operation by M31 0 will be executed only if the all axes except C-axis
are in reference point and each solenoid unit for Parts unloader(B) are in home position.
It will be finished when arm advance confirmation which is the last action is completed
and then the time set in PMC timer elapsed.
TM138; Parts unloader(B) right receive operation time (unit: msec)
The timer above must be set to fit to Parts unloader(B) advance operation time. The
wrong timer setting may be the cause of malfunction of machine.
The continuous operation by M11 will be executed only if the all axes except C-axis are
in reference point and each unit for Parts unloader(B) are in action position. It will be
finished when body return confirmation is completed.
OPERATION I 137
(2) Comparence of operation between TT1500/1800 and TT2000/2500
Operating method is different between TT1518 and TT2025, please refer below
1) TT1500/1800 series
Parts catcher
M 10 ; parts catcher advance.
M 11 ; parts catcher retract.
Parts unloader
M31 0 ; stand-by after body advance
M288; arm down ____, bucket down(continous operation)
M12 ; PTU return to home(it could be commanded in the middle of unexpected stop)
2) TT2000/2500 series
Parts catcher- no use, no option
Parts unloader
M210; stand-by at left side after body advance
M31 0 ; stand-by at right side after body advance
M10; bucket down ____, arm down(continous operation)
M11 ; PTU return to home(it could be commanded in the middle of unexpected stop)
I&CAUTIONI
1. When quick tool presetter is downed, Parts unloader(B) doesn't operate even if M310 is
commanded. In advance, check the status of quick tool presetter.
2. When Parts unloader(B) is in continuous operation, the operation will be stopped by
pressing feed hold switch. The operation will be restarted by pressing cycle start button.
16.2 Parts conveyor operation

Parts conveyor doesn't require any operation command. If M311 is completed, parts con-
veyor will stop automatically after the time set in PMC timer elapsed.
TM18; Parts conveyor operation time (unit: msec)
According the operation status, set the proper time. In case of stopping conveyor in
operating before the time elapsed, press emergency stop switch or "reset" switch on MDI
operation panel.
138 I Part 2
16.3 Parts unloader(B) and conveyor operation
- Right receive/return
Command M310 Command M10 or 11
~ ~
P.T.U Bucket Return
P.T.U Body Advance
P TLJ Arm Return
~ ~
P.T.U Arm Advance
PT_U Bucket Advance
[ P.T.U Body Return
l
~ ~
Time set in TM138 Load workpiece on parts
rnn\/o:>\Jnr
~ ~
Command M169 Parts Conveyor operate
~
NO
Right Chuck unclamp
Is the time set
in TM18
~
Work ejector operation may be
YES
added if needs (Option)
~ Parts Conveyor stop

Machining completed workpiece
will be loaded on parts catcher.
OPERATION I 139
16.4 Keep relay and parameter related to Parts unloader(B) and parts
conveyor
Keep relay can be set as follows related to Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor.
Set to "0" Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor aren't attached in the machine.
K8.6
Set to "1" Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor are attached in the machine.
Set the operation time of parts conveyor after commanding M11.

TM18
Set the operation time of Parts unloader(B) after commanding M310.
TM138
I&CAUTIONI
1. Set the proper time in TM 18 according to the operation status of conveyor.
2. Set TM138 with consideration of actual time elapsed for advancing of Parts unloader(B).
In case of setting the time too short, it may cause the malfunction of machine.
3. Never operate Parts unloader(B) without air supply. When air is supplied again after
stopping of air, operate Parts unloader(B) in a long distance from operating part of Parts
unloader(B).
16.5 Alarm related to Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor

Related to Parts unloader(B) and parts conveyor, alarm can occur as follows.
Alarm Content Level
2094 Parts unloader(B) operation time over. Cycle stop alarm
When commanding M31 0, each sol. unit isn't in the position
of home.
140 I Part 2
17. Air blow Air Pi e
Air blow is the device to inject air in order to remove

chips that attached to workpiece and chuck before
and after machining.
Air blow can not be operated by manual but be oper-
ated by commanding M-eade during automatic opera-
tion.
Left chuck Right chuck
17.1 Air blow operation

According the setting of keep relay, operation method after commanding is different.
During air blow is operated, spindle doesn't rotate. Air blow will be
Set to "0"
stopped when additional stop M-eade is commanded.
K8.2
During air blow is operated, spindle rotates. Air blow will be
Set to "1"
stopped after the time elapsed without additional stop M-eade.
(1) Air blow operation when K8.2 = 0

Air blow can be operated by commanding M-eade listed
Command M14/M114 below with classification of left and right chuck regardless
of upper or lower unit.
~ M14 ; Air will be injected into left chuck

M15; Air blow toward left chuck will stop.
Air blowing
M114; Air will be injected into right chuck
~ M115; Air blow toward right chuck will stop.
Finished M14/M114 Command "M14/M114", then air will be injected through

piping and spindle will not rotate.
~ Command :M15/M115", then air blow will stop.
Command M15/M115 If commanded M-eade is completed, the next automatic
operation will be continued.
~ In cases listed below, air blow in operating will stop without

commanding "M15/M115".
Stop air blowing
- In case of emergency stop status of machine.

-In case of pressing "Reset" switch on MDI operation panel.
- In case of commanding M02, M30. (Program end)
-In case of commanding MOO, M01. (Optional stop is used.)
OPERATION I 141
(2) Air blow operation when K8.2 = 1
Air blow can be operated by commanding M-eade listed below.
Command "M14/M114", then air will be injected through piping during spindle rotation,
and stop after the preset time elapsed.
Spindle rotation speed will be set in D data listed below.
041 O(Left) Do not input the rotation speed

Command M14/M114
D440(Right) directly. Set the value through the
equation in rotation speed.
(4095 X Rotation speed)

Spindle rotates and are Setting value = -:-:----:::--:---::----,---
Max. Spindle speed
blows
NO
Finish M14/M114
In general, the spindle speed at air blowing was set to 200 r.p.m. when shipping.
Regarding the details, refer to the parameter sheet of machine.
Air blow time and M14/M114 operation time is set in PMC timer listed below
TM32 Set the left chuck air blow time. (Setting unit : msec)
TM132 Set the right chuck air blow time. (Setting unit : msec)
According to the condition of cutting and the status of machine, set the proper time.
142 I Part 2
18. Signal tower & light {Option)
Signal tower and light is the device to check the current status of machine from the long dis-
tance.
In general, signal tower listed below will be attached by requirement in turning center.
-Signal tower: This consists of green, yellow and red light as a form of tower.
-Signal light : This is a green, yellow and red light that exists individually.
18.1 The machine status according to the light color of signal tower
Alarm currently occurs in the machine.
In case that automatic operation is in progress, red light
Red Red ON
isn't ON when some of alarm occur.
Yellow
After finishing automatic operation, red light will be ON.
Green
Automatic operation is over by M02, M30.
Yellow ON
Automatic operation is hold by MOO, M01.
Green ON Automatic operation is in progress normally.
18.2 The machine status according to the light color of signal light
(1) In case that one color is attached independently
[[!]
Red light ON
at using inde-
pendently
[[8] Yellow light

ON at using
independently
Alarm occurs in the machine.
In case that automatic operation is in progress, yellow light
[[!] Green light

ON at using
After finishing automatic operation, yellow light will be ON.
Automatic operation is in progress normally.

independently
OPERATION I 143
(2) In case that two colors are attached together

Red light ON In case that automatic operation is in progress, red
Red
light isn't ON when some of alarm occur.
+
g Yellow
Yellow light
ON
g Yellow Yellow light

+ ON In case that automatic operation is in progress, yellow light
Green isn't ON when some of alarm occur.

After finishing automatic operation, yellow light will be ON.
Green light ON Automatic operation is in progress normally.

Red Red light ON
+
Green
Green light ON Automatic operation is in progress normally.
(3) In case that three colors are attached together

~
In case that automatic operation is in progress, red light isn't
Red light ON
ON when some of alarm occur.
[(S] Yellow light

ON
[le] Green light

ON
Automatic operation is in progress normally.
144 I Part2
18.3 Keep relay related to signal tower and light
In case of the machine having signal tower and light, set the keep relay according to the
installed signal tower and light.
Set to "0" Red signal tower or light is not attached to the machine.
K1.0
Set to "1" Red signal tower or light is attached to the machine.
Set to "0" Yellow signal tower or light is not attached to the machine.
K1.1
Set to "1" Yellow signal tower or light is attached to the machine.
Set to "0" Green signal tower or light is not attached to the machine.
K1.2
Set to "1" Green signal tower or light is attached to the machine.
OPERATION I 145
19. Parts count {Option)
This is the function to count workpiece that the machining is completed and display. In gen-
eral, there are two kinds of method by requirement.
-Parts count function by means of NC function
- Count function by attaching external counter
Parts count display

19.1 Parts count function by means of NC
function
(1) Count method
If M-eade listed below is commanded, the value of
11BBB3 CIIJ:D- SIIB- 3l I
ltll'll
parts count will be increased and displayed. Gll1 Y25. r2111111 I
1153. I
lit v - 25. r550 1
M02 ; Program end 1157.5 I
Y39. l
M30 ; Program end and return to the top of program 1151.5 '
Y-39. l
1146. '
M54 ; Parts count Yl5. l
M54 can be used when M02 or M30 cannot used and

M99 is used. It is mainly used just before the program
is over.
If M02, M30 are used with M54 or if M54 is used with machining program, the count
value will be increased by one whenever the M-eade is commanded. Thus do not use
together.
1) Related NC parameter
Set to "0" Count will be operated by M02, M30.
N0.6700.#1
Set to "1" Count will not be operated by M02, M30.
Set to
N0.6710 Set the M-eade executing count except M02, M30.
"54"
N0.6711 Display counted value in screen.
Set the maximum count value.
If the counted value is same with the maximum value,
N0.6712
alarm will occur. In this case, automatic operation cannot be
executed until counted value is initialized.
2) Alarm treatment when count reached the maximum

Alarm occur when current counted value is same with the maximum value set in
parameter No. 6710, and automatic operation cannot be executed any more.
In this case, set the parameter No. 6710 to "0" or increase the setting value in No. 6711.
By initializing, alarm will be released and automatic operation can be continued.
146 I Part 2
19.2 Parts count function by attaching external counter
Amount of machining and using times of tool can be counted by means of attaching external
counter.
External counter that is attached to turning center generally, is shown below. According to
the requirement, function and the type of counter can be changed.
DAILY TOTAL COUNTER 1 COUNTER 2 COUNTER 3 COUNTER 4 COUNTER 5
· Daily work counter

Like the function of parts counter in NC, counted value will be increased by commanding
M02, M30 and M54.
Alarm will occur when current counted value is same with setting value, and automatic
operation is not available until alarm is released.
In order to release alarm, press "RST" switch in counter, then current counted value can be
initialized by "0" or setting value can be increased.
· Total work counter

Counted value is increased as daily counter does.
However, only current counted value is displayed, and cannot set the amount of machining.
· Tool counter
In general, using times of five tools can be counted individually.
The tool number that will be counted can be set in D data of PMC parameter. D data may be
different according to the machine. Refer to the parameter sheet of corresponding machine.
Regarding the counted tool, using limits can be set, and the count will be increased by
executing corresponding T-code.
Alarm will occur when the counted value is same with setting value, automatic operation is
not available until alarm is released.
The method to release alarm is same as daily work counter does.
OPERATION I 147
(1) Modify setting value of attached counter
In order to modify the setting value in counter shown in left side, operate as follows.
CD Press "~ 11 , then the setting value

Display current will be flickering.
counted value
® Press "~ ", then flickering value
Display setting value will be increased. Set the value
desired.
Initialization switch @ Press "~II to move another
position. Then continue to modify

....___ _ _+ Setting value
increasing switch another setting value .
....___ _ _ _ __. Setting value decimal
@ After finishing the modification of
point change switch
Function select setting value, press "~II continuously,
switch
then segment which displays setting
value will not be flickering and finish
the setting.
I ffiCAUTIONI
1. Do not operate the "MODE" switch arbitrarily. If the setting of counter is modified, then
operation abnormal may be occurred.
2. If current counted value reached to the setting value, then out lamp in counter will be ON
and alarm will occur generally.
In order to release alarm, press "RST" switch, then current counted value can be initialized
by "0" or the setting value can be increased.
19.3 Alarm related to parts counter

Alarms may occur as follows related to the parts and tool count
Alarm Content Level
2170 Number of tool usage is the same as set value. Single Block Alarm
Number of machined workpiece is the same as set value.
2162 Single Block Alarm
Initialize the current machining count.
Regarding the details related to alarm, refer to "Maintenance".
148 I Part 2
20. Work ejector {Option)
ht Chuck
Work ejector is the device to push the workpiece from right chuck, and to drop workpiece to
the outside of chuck by ejector's forwarding from inside of chuck. Work ejector is usually
used with Parts unloader(B), and dropped workpiece will be moved to loading bucket or
conveyor by means of Parts unloader(B).
Work ejector consists of ejector that penetrate right spindle, air cylinder that drives work
ejector in the opposite side of chuck and forward/retract detect sensors.
For the forward detecting, additional sensor will be used and for the retract detecting, sensor
attached to the cylinder will be used.
20.1 Work ejector operation

Work ejector can not be operated by manual operation and can only be operated by auto-
matic operation using M-eade listed below.
M116 ; Work ejector forward and retract
Command M-eade above, then work ejector will be forwarded and drop the workpiece. After
this, work ejector will be retracted and will be finished after confirmation of sensor.
For the normal operation of work ejector, the machine should be in the status listed below.
- Right spindle must be in stop status.
-Right chuck must be undamped before commanding M116.
-After commanding M318, the right chuck will be undamped and concurrently, the work
ejector will be forwarded.
-Work ejector must be retracted when retract sensor is ON.
Work ejector will not be retracted without sensor confirmation after forwarding.
In this case, work ejector will be retracted by the operation listed below.
- In case of pressing reset switch in MDI operation panel.
OPERATION I 149
20.2 Work ejector movement
Work ejector will operate as follows accompany with Parts unloader(B) etc.
Workpiece of chuck loaded

Command M310
on parts catcher bucket
Parts Catcher Receive

Work Eject retract
advance
Command M169 Eject retract sensor confirm
Chuck unclamp M116 finished
Command M116 Command M11
NO
Parts Catcher retract
operating confirm.
Right spindle stop
Work Eject advance
150 I Part2
20.3 Keep relay related to work ejector
Set to "0" Use retract sensor
K15.7
Set to "1" Ignore the retract sensor status
20.4 Alarm related to work ejector

Alarm may occur as follows related to the work ejector
Alarm Content Level
CD Work Ejector operation time has exceeded.
(I) Right spindle is not stopped.
2112 Feed hold alarm
@ Right chuck is not unclampped.
@ Q-Setter is lowered.
Spindle rotation is commanded on the status retract sensor

doesn not confirmed.
Regarding the details related to alarm, refer to "Maintenance".
OPERATION I 151
21. Auto power OFF {Option)
After completing the machining, power of machine will be OFF automatically.
In general, if M02 or M30 is commanded, the machining is considered as completing of
machining and the power of machine will be OFF. These operations will be done in
sequence.
However, in case that the machine has the peripheral device listed below, 'Auto power OFF'
may be operated not by M02 or M30 but by additional signal, M-eade or counter etc.
In this case, refer to the additional operating manual.
- Gantry loader
- Robot system
-Bar feeder
21.1 The sequence of auto power OFF

Press auto power OFF c==::J
switch in ooeration oannel
APF
The machining completed

Press auto power OFF switch, then the lamp in switch
will be ON, and if completing of machining is confirmed,
the power of machine will be OFF.
Emergency stop In case of releasing auto power OFF by pressing the
switch one more time before completing of machining,
automatic operation of the next workpiece will be
continued normally, but in case that auto power OFF is
in progress, auto power OFF can not be released.
MCCB NFB is tripped then the

main power will be OFF
152 I Part2
22. Auto door {Option)
Operator can open /close the front door of machine manually or automatically.
Auto door consists of air cylinder for opening/closing the front door of machine and sensor
for detecting the status of opening.
22.1 Auto door operation

[Manual mode selection]

HANDLE AXIS SELECT
Press the switch among switches shown in left side,
then the machine mode will be changed into manual
mode.
[Door open]
Press the switch in operation panel shown in left
c=::J
side, then the front door will be opened.
2 u/o
AUTO
DOOR [Door close]
Press the switch again in operation panel shown in
left side, then the front door will be closed.

The front door can be opened or closed using M-eade listed below.
M52 ; Front door open
M53 ; Front door close
After commanding, M-eade listed above will be finished after confirming the status of
sensor.
In case that the front door is opened, automatic operation can not be started. But in
case that the front door is opened by M52 command, automatic operation can be
executed with door opening
(3) Restriction in operation

Auto door operation is not available when the spindle rotation is in progress or the air
isn't supplied.
After supplying air and stop spindle rotation, operate auto door.
OPERATION I 153
I ffiCAUTIONI
1. Do not operate auto door when air doesn't supplied. In case of supplying air after air
interruption, be sure to keep away from operation part of auto door when the auto door is
operated.
2. In case of supplying air again or operating auto door after the interruption of air for a long
time, be sure to keep away from the operation part of auto door when the auto door is
operated.
22.2 Keep relay related to auto door

Set to "0" Not use auto door function.
K20.2
Set to "1" Use auto door function
22.3 Alarm related to auto door

Alarm may occur as follows related to the auto door.
Alarm Content Level
2041 Auto door operation time over Cycle stop alarm
154 I Part2
23. Chip conveyor {Option)
This is the device to extract the chip that is generated in machining to the outside of
machine.
Basically in the lateral side of electric control cabinet, the connector is prepared to attach
chip conveyor.
Spec. of
Classification Wiring No. Standard/Option
connector in box
Chip Conveyor MS3102A 22-14S WC61 Option
In case of attaching chip conveyor by customer oneself, attach chip conveyor after
consulting with DHIM.
23.1 Chip conveyor operation

The next operating explanation is only for attaching chip conveyor of DHIM. In case of
another chip conveyor, operation method may be different with explanation listed below.

Manual operation panel of chip conveyor is attached to the chip conveyor.
Forward operation switch Chip conveyor will be rotated in the forward direction.
Reverse operation switch Chip conveyor will be rotated in the reverse direction.
Stop switch Chip conveyor will be stopped.
Operation is available regardless of the operation mode of machine, but the machine
must be in the status listed below.
-The status that the front door is closed.

Chip conveyor can be operated using M-eade listed below.
M24; Conveyor forward rotation
M25 ; Conveyor stop
And operation method may be different according to the setting of keep relay.
After commanding M24, additional command such as M25 is
Set to "0"
required in order to stop conveyor.
K1.7 After command M24, additional command isn't required in order
Set to "1" to stop conveyor. The conveyor will stop automatically after the
time set in PMC parameter elapsed.
OPERATION I 155
1) In case of setting K1.7 to "0"
- Conveyor operation Command M24
- Conveyor stop Command M25
Emergency stop
Open the front door
2) lncaseofsettingK1.7to"1"
- Conveyor operation Command M24
- Conveyor stop Command M25
Emergency stop
Open the front door
Conveyor will stop after the time set in PMC parameter elapsed
Set the chip conveyor operation time. (Setting unit : msec)
(3) In case that the front door is opened during chip conveyor is operating
In case that the front door is opened during chip conveyor is operating by M24
command, conveyor will stop.
However, close the front door and press cycle start switch again, then automatic opera-
tion will be continued and conveyor will start its operation without command.
But in case of pressing reset switch in MDI operation panel before operation, chip con-
veyor will not start without command.
156 I Part2
24. How to set the reference point of dogless machine
The reference point can be set without using deceleration signal for reference point return
(dog type). That is, the reference point is set by ON of axis jog selection signai(JOG+ or
JOG-) in manual reference point return mode after moving the tool by jog feeding around
reference point( reference point mark set in machine body) which is defined on each axis.
When the reference point return is executed in the machine using the encoder of absolute position
detect type, the reference point set once will keep on its value even if the power is turned off.
The axes that the reference point return in dogless type can be executed are the whole axes
except C-axis in TT type machine and the axes related to the lower unit in MX machine.
24.1 Procedure on reference point setting

(1) Turn on the power, and move the axis wanted to set reference point using jog feeding
in the direction of reference point return, around the reference point mark (within 1 grid),
and then decide the position.
At this time, because the reference point is not confirmed yet (Parameter 1815#4(APZ),
#5(APC)=O), be sure to move the axis with the speed exceeding the servo position
deviation (Parameter No. 1836) more than once in order to confirm the reference point.
Grid
1
Grid Grid
1 1
Referesz point mark
-direction
•
Position decision point of G)
+direction
(2) Change the mode to reference point return mode, execute reference point return by
pressing jog(+) switch at the position around reference point mark.
At this time, the axis will execute the reference point return in the direction of(+) from
the current position(CD position decision), and stop at the first grid. The point which the
axis stops will become the reference point of axis.
Grid Grid Grid

Reference point mark
Position decision point of®
Grid shift value
OPERATION I 157
(3) At this time, the relevant reference point LED will be turned ON on operation panel.
(Even if this point is checked, Parameter No. 1815#4(APZ) = 0)
(4) n case that the point above is different to the reference point mark, shift the reference
point using the value of grid shift.
From the point set above, move the relevant axis to the position coinciding with the
mark by handle. Then input the difference from the reference point value to the mark
into grid shift value (Parameter No. 1815).
(At this time, the grid shift value must be less than the value set in Parameter No. 1821
(Ref. counter capacity) and in case of X-axis, input in the value of diameter.)
If this value is greater than the value set in Parameter No. 1821, execute ®A-®E again
from the position shifted by 1 grid.
Grid Grid Grid

Reference point mark
-direction --t----------t---~~-------- +direction
Position decision point of@
Grid shift value => input to Par.1850 (Input in diameter value to X-axis)
(5) Set the Parameter No. 1815#5(APC) by 1 and turn off the power of NC and then turn
on the power.
(6) After turning on the power of NC, execute the reference point return from the position
set in CD again by jog feeding. If the reference point return has been finished, the
reference point is shifted by the setting value in Parameter No. 1850 and the setting of
reference point will be completed around the location which is almost coincided with
reference point mark of axis (If the value set in @ is correct).
Parameter No. 1815#4(APZ) will be set by "1" automatically after completing the refer-
ence point return. The reference point set from these procedure is coincided with grid
point of servo motor.
If the parameter No. 1815#4 is set by 1 automatically, it means that the reference point return
is finished. After that, this point will be memorized as reference point even if the power is
turned off.
158 I Part2
Grid Grid Grid
- direction --1----------t1----R-ef-e-re-
i -¥c-e_p_o-in_t_m_a_r_k---t1....__ + direction
Reference point return finished when the gird is shifted.
24.2 Related parameter

Make the reference point return without dog on corresponding axis
1005#1 "1 II
enable
Set the initial direction of reference point return of corresponding
1006#1 "1 II
axis and backlash on power input
I&CAUTIONI
1. In this type of reference point return setting, the reference point mark is recorded with
correct value on each axis which composes the machine. And the job of reference point
return must be executed around those reference point mark. Therefore, the reference point
mark with correct value in regards to each axis must exist.
2. In case that the position of XO. isn't actual position after finishing the setting, execute @
above and add the position deviation value of XO. to the value of grid shift. Then input this
value in Parameter No. 1815.
3. In the machine that has theY-axis, set the reference point after releasing the slant axis
control (Parameter No. 8200#0=1590159).
OPERATION I 159
25. Torque control function
Each of servo axes in general turning center executes the position and speed control by the
command of NC. But the torque control function by PMC control is the function that controls
the servo axes using constant torque without executing the position control.
25.1 Block diagram for realization of torque control function by PMC axis
control
7J
PMC I Servo
I Torque command I t
[ Allowable speed command :
+
_~Speed control ~
Torque
limiter ~
p
\ I
®
25.2 The function of turning center using torque control
1) Workpiece center supporting function using right spindle or Z2-axis.
(Variable torque command)
2) Cutoff confirmation function (Applied on MS, SY and S type machine)
160 I Part 2
25.3 Workpiece center supporting function using right spindle or Z2-axis.
(Variable torque command)
In TT/MX machine of opposable twin spindle, upper and lower turret turning center, this
function is executed by commanding G-eode on program in order to machine the shaft with
supporting the center by installing the tail center at right spindle.
Example on machining program

GOO A****.; 1) Rapid feeding to 1OOmm around from the end of tool post
G300 B-200.; 2) Start to advance in(-) direction in torque (200000)
GOO X*** Z***.; Approach to the tool post for machining
G01 X***,; Machining workpiece
G301; Cancel the torque control mode
Note1)
For avoiding the no load alarm range(100mm), approach to the around of 100mm.
Because A-axis position control isn't executed, the advance will keep on going until the
tool confronts the load. Therefore, in order to avoid this problem, compare the position
where G300 is commanded to the position where the tool stops by confronting the load.
If the value is over 100mm, alarm 2072 (Torque control command alarm) occurs. The
no load range can be set in PMC data (02000).
OPERATION I 161
Note2)
G300 is the code to call macro program as below and B variable is macro variable to
transfer the torque data. (Be sure to mark the point on torque command data)(-) value
means that the tool moves in(-) direction in machine coordinate system, and (+)means
that the tool moves to(+) direction in machine coordinate system.
25.4 Propulsion conversion table according to torque command value
HIIl
9W
am -~
z----
c0
ii1:::J
700
600
..
__ .....-' ~
0.. ~~
e
D..
5(1)
,.,.-""'"
400 ........... ___.
/
300
,.k~
200
100
0
.. ~~ .....-
200 3(1) 400 500 6{1] 700 8(1) 9 0 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800
NC command value
I&CAUTIONI
A-axis center supporting function is executed by G300 command in upper NC program, and
Z2-axis center supporting function is executed by G300 command in lower NC program.
162 I Part 2
25.5 Cutoff confirmation function (Applied on MS, SY, S type machine)
In the machine having the right spindle, this function confirms whether the cutting is finished
or not after cutting the workpiece. the hardware part is eliminated from the machine and the
cutoff confirmation function is executed using the torque control function of NC itself.
Example on machining program

GOO X*** Z***; Tool escape after cutoff (rapid feeding)
G350; 2) Cutoff confirmation function enable
G04 U0.5; Dwell after cutoff confirmation function
GOO A***,; A-axis retract
(1) If G350 is commanded, A-axis will move as much set on 04000 in(+) direction At this
time, the deviation is greater than 1.0mm, then executes the next block and if not, cutoff
confirmation error NC alarm No. 3003 occurs.
---1~~ 1.0mm 0 1%
Left Spindle Right Spindle
OPERATION I 163
26. Tool post interference check function
This function is for stopping the machine safely when tool post of upper/lower turret is inter-
fered to the body of left/right spindle during the manual feeding or automatic feeding.
Upper turret
Interference zoneD
check
II
r-
r-
w ~
Left chuck Right chuck
26.1 How to set the tool post interference zone

(1) How to set interference zone on upper unit
1) With select the upper unit, set the related parameter for realization of function (Refer
to parameter sheet).
2) All of axes on upper unit return to the reference point.
3) With finishing the reference point return, set K3#3 = "1". Then NC reads parameters
related to the interference zone.
4) If NC finish to read parameters, the lamp of optional stop will flicker.
5) If the lamp flickers, set the K3#3 = "0".
26.2 Tool post interference zone M-code

M-eade of interference function is available both if in upper program and lower program.
Set the interference zone function between upper/lower tool post and
M110
left/right spindle invalid.
M111 Set the interference zone function enable.
I&CAUTIONI
1. If NC is reset, M 110 will be canceled automatically even if M 111 isn't commanded, and
interference function will be enable.
2. Interference zone is not checked in Handle mode.
164 I Part2
27. C-axis composition control
The composition control is the function to control a certain axis (C1 ,C2) of another path.
27.1 Conditions and methods of composition control

(1) Other unit spindles must stop.
(2) Command other unit C-axis selection M-eade.
(3) REVOLVING spindle selection switch and RIGHT/LEFT SPINDLE selection switch
LEOs flicker simultaneously, and other unit C-axis can be controlled.
27.2 M-code related to composition control

(1) C2-axis control in UPPER unit
Right spindle changes to C-axis mode, low winding automatically and C2-
M135
axis can be controlled.
Right spindle changes to spindle mode, high winding automatically and
M134
C2-axis control is cancelled.
(2) C1-axis control in LOWER unit

Left spindle changes to C-axis mode, low winding automatically and C1-
M35
axis can be controlled.
Left spindle changes to spindle mode, high winding automatically and C1-
M34
axis control is cancelled.
I ffiCAUTIONI
1. In C-axis selection state, even if main power is OFF/ON, the previous C-axis state is
maintained.
2. C1, C2-axis cannot be selected together in one unit.
OPERATION I 165
27.3 Example program of composition control
(1) CD C1 & C2 composition control simultaneous machining of upper and lower unit
UPPER PROGRAM LOWER PROGRAM

M 135;(C2-axis select) M35;(C1-axis select)
1-PATH [b GOG55X200 .Z-1 00 .T040 14; GOG55X200.Z-1 OO.T01 002;
[1? C1
G28HO;
G50CO;
G28HO;
G50CO;
(L-SPINolf) G97S2500X90.CO.M03P12; G97S2750X50.CO.M03P22;
C2d]
qJ I 2-PATH G28UOHOVO;
M05P12;(MILL. stop)
G28UOHOVO;
M05P22;(REV. stop)
M134;(C2-axis OFF) M34;(C1-axis OFF)
166 I Part 2
(2) The composition control of C1-axis in Path1 & turning machining with left spindle in
Path2
UPPER PROGRAM LOWER PROGRAM
1-PATH , ,
M05P21 ;(SPINDLE stop)
M 135;(C2-axis select);
GOG55X200 .Z -1 00. T040 14; GOG97S 1500X250. M03P 1
1;
(L-SPINDLi)
C2dJ G28HO;
G50CO;
G97S2500X90.CO.M03P12;
X36.M8;
G1G99X28.F.09;
,
q] 2-PATH
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
(3) C2-axis composition control ,
after turning machining ,
,
with left spindle in path2. ,
, ,
, M05P11;
, ,
, M35;(C1-axis select)
, ,
, ,
,
, G28HO;
, G50CO;
, G97S2750X50.CO.M03P22
,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
M05P12;(MIL. stop) M05P22;(REV. stop)
G28UOHOVO; G28UOHOVO;
, ,
M30 M30
OPERATION I 167
28. Periodic inspection function
(1) Introduction
The periodic inspection function is a function that helps dispose and manage periodic
expendable items.
Also, it is possible to choose name and service period of inspection items, and the
countdown method for them.
1) Screen configuration
CD Status screen : Periodic inspection items, remaining time, countdown method is
displayed and inspection list can be changed.
® Setting screen : Setting period, remaining time and countdown method is
displayed.
(2) Screen display and setting
2.1 Press sys1em key. B

2.2 Pres the extension key on the right until [PERIOD MAINTE] soft key ( t:>)
appears.
2.3 If [PARIOD MAINTE] soft key, periodic inspection screen appears.
(3) Method for loading periodic inspection item list from CF CARD to NC
1) In the setting screen, change to 'PWE' ='1', 1/0 CHANNEL ='4' and change mode to
[EDIT] mode.
2) Press sys1em key. B

3) 3.3 Press the extension key on the right until [PARIOD MAINTE] soft key appears.
168 I Part 2
DJAGHOSTIC
00000 N00080
9010 PUNCHING
Inpoaltton c~
FHdrat~ o- I~ 0'.
Jog Fud o..--r-t~ 0'~
8031 TH MTA<FG>
lnter/St r- Leek on
Spe-ed~r iva I on
•*
\Ia Revo lut oon
fH DATA CBG>
Stop P<>a 1t:ion Codrr

F~ St:op
8088
F-vounct R~ d "'9
&d<go"ound R~ad mg
OPERATION 169
4) If [PARIOD MAINTE] soft key is pressed as below, periodic inspection screen
appears and press (OPRT) soft key.
ACTUAL POSITIOH
00000 N00080
ABSOLUTE
F 0HH/HIHI
1200 • 000 PARTS COUHT 1238
RUH TIHE 191H48H311S
628 • 9 0 4 CYCLE TIHE 11H 11H1?S
PERIODICAL HAIHTEHAHCE
76 • 800 <STATUS)
-90.000 ,-----~
I~TE
=H~H~
A~HE
~----~, REHAIH
0.000 :~ ~-------------------2''
~--------------------:
113
HODAL 114
lil111 li811 li13. 1 F 251111 H 266 115
li9? li6? li511. 1 H 116
li69 li54 li49 D 1 11?
li99 li64 li15 HD. T 9111111 118
li21 li19 lil15. 5 5 1125 HX . T 11 119
li411 li69.11i54.4 111
li25 li411.11i811.5
li22 li511. 21i811. 4
s 11 SLH 11
5) In the screen below, if the extension key on the right is pressed, [READ] and
[PUNCH] menu will appear as shown below.
ACTUAL POSITIOH
00000 N00080
ABSOLUTE
F 0HH/HIH
1200 • 000 PARTS COUHT 1238
RUH TIHE 191H48H311S
628 • 9 0 4 CYCLE TIHE 11H 11H1?S
76 • 800 (STATUS)
-90.000 111
ITEH HAHE REHAIH
0.000 112
113
114
HODAL
lil111 li811 li13. 1 F 251111 H 266 OS
li9? li6? 6511. 1 H 06
li69 li54 649 D 1 0?
699 li64 li15 HD. T 9111111 08
li21 li19 lil15. 5 5 1125 HX. T 11 09 I
li411 li69.1G54.4 10
li25 li411.11i811.5
622 li511. 26811.4
s 11 SLH 11
170 Part 2
ACTOOL POSITIOH
00000 N00080
AJISOLUT
F 0 twttiNI
X1 1200 e 0 0 0 PARTS CllUfT l2:J8
z~ 628 9 nli4
~ •
RUN Til£
CYCLE Til£
191H48H30S
8H OH 1?S
C1 76 • 8 0 0 <STATUS)
B -90 .000 ..---.:.

l l:.;D
;;;.;_NAI£
t ;.;:.;;=._ _ _ RatA IN
y 0 .000
01
07 ~----------------~
03
Od
ltODAI..
GOO G80 Gl3.1 F" 2500 " 266 oe.
69? 66? GSO.l H 06
669 G54 649 D 1 0?
699 664 61: HD. T 9808 00
G21 G19 G05. s s 1125 NX. T B 119
648 669.1654 . 4 18
G25 648.1680.5
622 658.2688.4
A)"
s B Slt1 B
6) If [READ] and [EXEC] are pressed, the periodic inspection items in CF card loads
into NC.
M I
8 11
Ill' 14411 11
83 I•HII II
84 144t ll
•• IHe li
e?
"(211 11
OPERATION 171
(4) Method of adding periodic inspection items
1) In the periodic inspection screen,
placed the cursor in an empty slot in
the 'STATUS' screen.
(STATUS)
ITEH NAHE REHAIN
Ill C TYPE-A HT-PUHA-LYNX~~ llH
0102 LEAN AND CHANGEHYD . OIL JI 1441lH
0103 HECK SLIDE CO 1441lH 2) Key in the desired inspection item
0104 LEAN LUB. OIL FILTER jl 1441lH
0105 HECK ALL BELT TENSION _JI 1441lH and press the [INPUT] soft key.
06
ll? The item keyed in is entered.
llB
09
10 (STATUS)
ITEH NAHE REHAIN
IP' 81 [ C TYPE A HT PUHA LYNX ~ 8H
s ll L ll% 0182 ~LEAN AND CHANGEHYD.OIL 1448H
~r HDI *' * * * * * * * * * I• " 13 : 22 : 88 II 0103 HECK SLIDE COVER WIPER 1440H
0104 LEAN LUB. OIL FILTER 1440H
lr HANGE i r NTRY l r LEAR l r INPUT l r NPUT

11 1
~ 0105 ~HECK ALL BELT TENSION_
06 CLEAN FAN FILTER
0?
1441lH
llH
08 I
09 I
II
18b II
,.
s ll L ll%
IIJ HDI *'*** *** *** l l -w13 = 23 : 35 ~'
I
~
c"''"E P.•"' I LEAR +INPUT NPUT ~
172 Part 2
3) After entering item, if [CHANGE] key is pressed, the following setting screen will
appear.
~TUAL POSITION
00456 N00000
(ABSOLUTE)
X -0.0005 IF
JOG F HIBBB
0 HH/H 27
PART COUNT
y -2.0000 RUN TIHE BH BH CYCLE TIHE BH BH 0S
z -3.0000 (SETTING)
LIFE REHAIN COUNT TVPE
a
01 r=::]~ ~~ c.------::ll
0102
0103 ~fiH I 11111BH
I 11111BH
<HODAU OIBII I 11111BH I 11111BH
+ ~~
~01 GliB GSII F H 0105 l 11111f21H UNNING
~1? Gll9 G611 H 06 BH
~9B G8B G69 H H B?
~22
~911
~21
G98 G15
G5B GliB. 1
G67 625
D
s
SACT B
HD. T
NX. T
08
09
10
§ ~
i=
~
i= = =
!It ~
s B L 0%
II HDI **** *** *** II II 13 : 211 : B? II
II I ABS
I
REL
I I I I
ALL HNDL .._HANGE TYPE CLEAR !+ INPUT INPUT II
4) Before 'LIFE' row, enter the item entered in number 6. Also, press [TYPE] soft key
and choose the countdown type as shown in the red box below.
(SETTING)
COUHT TYPE LIFE REHAIH
-
0~
IU
0102 UHH I HG
01
0102 I1440
c=:::!!H
I 1440H
0103 UHHIHG 0103 I 1440H I 1440H
... ~ ~r
0104 UHHIHG 0104 I 1440H I 1440H
0105 UHHIHG 0105
06 06
0? 0?
08 08
09 09
10 1
0 L 0%
HDI **** **>I<
I~" c"'l RLL

I PWR OH I
RUH
I CUT
II I
OPERATION 173
5) Description of countdown type
Soft key Meaning Display
[NO CNT] Does not count -
[ALL] Always counts All times
[PWRON] Counts when NC of equipment is Power On Power-on time
[RUN] Counts when equipment is in cycle Operating
[CUT] Counts when equipment is cutting Cutting
* The standard countdown setting value for DIC is '

(5) Method for deleting periodic inspection items
1) In order to delete the registered periodic items, place the

cursor on the item to be deleted and and press [CLEAR]
soft key.
{~I A IUS)
ITEH NAHE REHAIN
01 TC TYPE-A HT-PUHA-LYNX-P OH
@02 ~LEAN AND CHANGEHYD.OIL 1440H
@OJ ~HECK SLIDE COVER WIPER 1440H
@04 ~LEAN LUB. OIL FILTER 1440H
@05 ~HECK ALL BELT TENSION 1440H
@06 ~LEAN FAN FILTER 720H
07 II
08 II
09 II
10 '= u
l~ r
s 0 L 0%
~~ HDI **** *** ***"II" li 1J : 21 : 18 11
I~N6E
r
NTRY ( CLEAR
""""
!+ INPUT INPUT II
2) Press [EXEC] soft key.
(STATUS)
ITEH NAHE REHAIN
01 [ c TYPE-A HT-PUHA-LYNX-A OH
@02 ~LEAN AND CHANGEHYD.OIL I 1440H
@OJ ~HE~K SLIDE COVER WIPER 1440H
@04 ~EAN LUB. OIL FILTER 1440H
@05 t::HECK ALL BELT TENSION 1440H
@06 CLEAN FAN FILTER 720H
o7 I.
08 I.
09 I.
10 .b:: I
It"
5 0 L 0%
lr HDI **** "'"'"' "'"'"' l r -W13 : 21 : 50 II
II I I I I I I CAN EXEC
174 I Part 2
3) If [EXEC] soft key is pressed, the selected item is deleted as shown in the figure
below.
(SHHUS)
ITEH HAHE 1
REHAIH
01 [ c TYPE-A HT-PU~LVHX-P OH
~02 ~ LEAH AHD CHAHGEHVD.OIL 1440H
~03 ~ HECK SLIDE COVER WIPER 1440H
~04 ~ LEAH LUB. OIL FILTER 1440H
~05 ~ HECK ALL BELT TEHSIOH 1440H
06
0?
08
09
10
CHAHGE EHTRV CLEAR +IHPUT IHPUT m
(6) Method to cancel periodic inspection period expired message I Method to reset
remaining time
1) If periodic inspection period has expired, it is displayed on screen as shown below.
CD As explained above, in the periodic inspection state screen, periodic item name
and remaining time is displayed.
® Among the entered items, if one reaches the periodic inspection setting time,
[REMAIN] time is displayed as OH.
* If the remaining time reaches the %value entered in parameter P8911 of the set
life time, period expiration message is displayed.
OPERATION I 175
In the bottom right of the screen, "MAINTE" is displayed as shown in the figure below
and Message covers the clock function so the time does not show.
UfL POSIT IIIH
00010 N00000
X -0.0005
y -2.0000 RUN TIHE EIH BH CYCLE TI HE BH Bl1 BS
z -3.0000 <STATUS)
ITEH NAHE REHAII-1
EIH
1H
14<UIH
<NODAL) 011'14 14<UIH
OJ=~ F=...:..:::=--:=.:........:..:::..:=~
64!1 654 F H 14<UIH
1? 649 664 H
=~ i==========l!
liBEl 669 H H
li9B 615 D HD . T
~: 1=------~==ll
65!1 64!1.1 NX . T
66? 625 s
SACT El
1 ~31
2) In the screen above, press the [CHANGE] soft key and change to 'SETTING
SCREEN'.
UfL POSITIIIH
00010 N00098
<ABSOLUTE)
X -0.0005 F
JOG F 111BBEI PART COUNT
0 HH/H
2?
y -2.0000 RUN TIHE BH EIH CYCLE TI HE BH EIH EIS
z -3.0000 COUHT TYPE

Ill
illl2
illl3
<HODAU illl4
li4EI li54 F H illl5
li49 li64 H ll6
liBEl li69 H H ll?
li9B li15 D HD. T BB
liSE! li41'1.1 NX . T 1'19
li6? li25 s 11'1
SACT II
176 Part 2
3) In the 'SETTING' screen, place the cursor in the 'REMAIN' row of the item which
has '0' remaining time, then press [CLEAR] soft key. Afterwards, press [EXEC] soft
key.
UAI... POSITION
X -0.0005 JOG F 10000 PART COUNT 2?

y -2.0000 RUN TIHE BH BH CYCLE TIHE BH BH OS
z -3.0000 <SETTING)
LIFE
Ill I Btl
0102 144BH
OIIJJ I 1440H
<HODAU
!! 1
01 G40 G54 F H
1? G49 G64 H
90 GBB G69 H H
22 G9B G15 D HD.T
94 GSB G40.1 NX.T
21 G6? G25 s 10
SACT 0
0 L 0 '::
4) Resets to life time where remaining time is set. Also, the [MAINTE.] display on the
bottom of screen disappears.
UAI... POSITION
_____00010 N00098
(ABSOLUTE)
X -0.0005 RUN TIHE BH BH CYCLE TIHE

2?
BH OH OS
y -2.0000
z -3.0000 <SETTING)
LIFE REHAIN
01 c : : : ]H
I Btl
0102 1440H
OIOJ ~
~
I 1440H
<HODAU 0104
~~
I 1440H
01 G40 G54 F H 0105
1? G49 G64 H 06
90 GOB G69 H H 0?
22 G9B G15 D HD.T 08
94 GSB G40. 1 NX.T 09
21 G6? G25 s 10
OPERATION 177
(7) Method to change the periodic inspection item countdown type
1) In the 'SETTING' screen, place the cursor in the item whose countdown type is to
be changed. Then press [TYPE] soft key.
liAI... POSITION
00010
X -0.0005 JOG F 18888 PART COUNT
0 MM/M
2?
RUN TIME BH 8 M CYCLE TIME 8 H 8 M 85
y -2.0000
z -3.0000 (5 N
LIFE REMAIN
81 I !]H ~!i
0182 I 1440H I 1448
0183 I 1448H 1448H
(MODAU 0184 I 1448H I 1448H
~~
li48 li54 F M 0185
li49 li64 M 86
li88 li69 H M 8?
li98 li15 D HD.T 88
li58 li48.1 NX.T 89
li6? li25 5 18
5ACT 8
s 8 L 8%
,€;1il1 •••J I I r 14 : 44 : 19 II I
2) Press [TYPE] soft key and among the different countdown types, press the soft key
of the desired type. For example, if counting is not desired press [NO CNT] soft key.
liAI... POSITION
0121010 N00098
CABS
X -121.1211211215 JOG F 1BBBB

121 MM/M 2?
PART COUHT
y -2.121121121121 RUH TIME BH El M CYCLE TIME BH ElM BS
z -3.121121121121 (SEll HUD

LIFE
B1 ~H
OIB2 I 144BH
OIB3 I 144BH
<MODAL) OIB4 I 144BH
li4B li54 F M OIBS ~
li49 li64 M B6
li88 li69 H M 8?
li98 li15 D HD.T 88
liSE! li4B.1 HX . T B9
li6? li25 s HI
SACT B
178 I Part 2
* For reference, the description for each countdown type is as shown below.
Soft key Meaning Display

[NO CNT] Does not count -
[ALL] Always counts All times
[PWRON] Counts when NC of equipment is Power On Power-on time
[RUN] Counts when equipment is in cycle Operating
[CUT] Counts when equipment is cutting Cutting
3) If the desired countdown type is pressed, 'COUNT TYPE' of the periodic items
change as shown in the figure below.
(The picture below is when 'NO CNT' is pressed. It means, counting is not done.)
~CTIJAI... POSITION
00010 N00098
(Ali~ULUI t:.J
X -0.0005 IF
JOG F 10000
0 HH/H 2?
PART COUNT
y -2.0000 RUN TIHE BH BH CYCLE TIHE BH BH OS
z -3.0000 (::.t:.II!NI:IJ
LIFE REHAIN COUNT TYPE
01 ~!"I ~ F-------;1
02 1 1440~ 1 --------
0103 I 144BH 1 ~UNNING
~~
<HODAU 0104 144BH ~UNNING
l:i01 G4B G54 F H 0105 ~ I 144BH ~UNNING
l:i1?
l:i9B
G49 G64
G8B G69 H
H
H
06
B? B I
§ §
I
l:i22 G98 G15 D HD. T 08 _jl
l:i94
l:i21
G5B GliB. 1
G6? G25 s
NX. T 09
10
I II
I~ Jl
SACT B
It"
s B L B:Y.
.El **** *** *** - W ll : illl : 5? II
II I"" I ~, I"" I~" I I

CHANGE T'iPE CLEAR INPUT INPUT II
OPERATION I 179
29. Machine air-bag function
(1) Introduction
If machine is faulty or if tool cutter
is blunt during machining or
damaged by collision, there is
much more load on the motor
than during normal operation.
This function tries to minimize the
damage to just one motor is
possible when a defective load is
detected on the servo motor. So,
although feed distance is very
minute, motor rotates in the
reverse direction of the feed
direction.
(2) MACHINE AIR-BAG function

applied servo axis
This function is applied to X1, Y,
Z1, A, X2, Z2 servo axis.
(3) Related M-CODE

M274: MACHINE AIR-BAG function release.
M275 : MACHINE AIR-BAG function setting.
I &CAUTION!
Machine air-bag function is not a function to prevent machine collision, but a function to
minimize damage to servo motor in the case of machine collision or machining.
180 I Part2
Part 3 PROGRAMMING
1. Automatic re-cycle start
1.1 Function description
Automatic re-cycle start can be used to restart the automatic operation without operating of
the cycle start switch after completion of the machining program by M02 or M30.
That is, when commanding the M55 just before M02 or M30 block, the program is finished
once and restarts from the top of program. In addition, this loop is executed repeatedly.
Automatic re-cycle start is used mainly in case that M02 or M30 is absolutely needed when
using the following functions.
- Tool life management
- Tool load monitoring
1.2 M-code
M55 : Automatic re-cycle start
1.3 How to use (Sample program)

1 .4 c::::::::)
~
-Example) Check in a state of lighted lamp, after butten is pushed
Program Description
,..... 00001; Program No.
G28UOWO;
Step1. The part of machining program
'---- M55; Step2. Automatic re-cycle start command of the machining program
M30; Step3. Program end
-After completing M30, the machining program will restart automatically from the top of the
program.
PROGRAMMING I 181
2. Rigid Tapping
2.1 Function description
It can be executed the high-speed and high-precision tapping work through the synchronous
control between the tapping axis and the spindle during the tapping cycle.
2.2 Synchronous tapping command M-code & G-eode
I M176
"M176" is commanded only if a left-handed thread is about to be cut by changing the direc-
tion of spindle to reverse. It must be used before commanding "M29 S x x x x Pxx ;"
I M177
"M177" is used to change the direction of spindle which have been reversed by M176 com-
mand. It must be used after commanding "G80".
I M29 Sxxxx Pxx
M29 :This is the rigid tapping M-eade. It must be used before commanding G-eode.
G84(G88) cycle that don't use the M29 code will be activated with normal tapping.
Sxxxx : Command the spindle speed when rigid tapping.
Pxx : Selects the spindle by P-code.
I G84(G88)Z-C_Z(X)_R_P_F_K(M89)
G84 : G84 is the front face tapping cycle. It is used to command the tapping operation
(G88) to the direction of Z-axis.
G88 is the side face tapping cycle. It is used to command the tapping operation
to the direction of X-axis.
X(Z) C :Command the position to be tapped.
C-axis command can be used only the machine types that have the rev.
spindle.
Z(X) : Command the bottom position of tapping hole.
R : Command the R position which is the tapping start position.
P : Command the dwell time during returning to the bottom position of the tapping
hole and R position.
F : Command the feedrate during the tapping operation.
K : Command the repetition number of tapping.
M89 : It is the high clamp M-eade of C-axis and is used to clamp/unclamp automatically.
However, it can be used only the machine types that have the rev. spindle.
G80
G80 : Release the rigid tapping state.

In case that the rigid tapping is not completed normally after executing the
182 I Part3
G84(G88), the rigid tapping cycle must be completed using G80.
2.3 Example of the rigid tapping

The following table shows the example program that cuts the workpiece to 12 tapping hole
by 30-degree intervals using the milling tool and C-axis. "M72" and "M73" must be used only
in a left-handed thread tapping.
Program Description
M35 Select the rev. spindle.
G28UOWO Execute "1st reference point return of X and Z-axis".
G28HO Execute "1st reference point return of C-axis".
T0202 Select the milling tool.
M176 Use only when tapping the left-handed thread.
G98GOOX135.Z20.M8 Move to the start position in the feed mode per minute.
M29S800 P12 Command the rotation speed of rigid tapping and milling tool.
Start tapping (G84 ).
Move C-axis by 30-degree intervals from current position (H30.)
C-axis is clamped(M89)
G84H30.Z-25.R- Rapid traverse from Z20.0 to Z5.0 position.(R-15.)

15.F1400K12M89 Milling tool starts to rotate, Z-axis is moving and start to tapping.
(Z-25. F1400)
After completing once the tapping operation and then repeat it 12
times.(K12)
That is, executes the tapping of 12 holes by turning every 30-
degree of C-axis
G80 Complete the tapping mode
By commanding M 177, restore the rotational direction of spindle
M177
which had been changed.
G28UOWO Execute "1st reference point return of X and Z-axis"
M30 End of program
- R position
- Spindle CW rotation
& tapping start
- Bottom position of
~
r
tapping hole
-Spindle stop / ~
-(------- /' ~ 1- Start""'""' I

fl\/
® ® ------~ \::.) <C-- --- -- Rapid traverse
~
+--- Feed traverse
\ _ _ -Bottom position of
tapping hole G) Start position
-Spindle CCW start .------------,
- R position
® Rposition
- Spindle stop
& tapping complete
® Bottom position
2.4 c
PROGRAMMING I 183
autions in the rigid tapping
(1) Cautions before commanding
1) Rigid tapping must be executed in G97 mode( Constant surface control cancel).
2) The spindle must be selected before executing the rigid tapping.
3) In case that a left-handed thread will be cut, command M176 before M29.
(2) Cautions during executing

1) Feed override of axis and spindle are fixed at 100% and cannot be changed during
rigid tapping.
2) Single block and feed hold are not available during rigid tapping.
3) The command of machine lock and dry run is available during rigid tapping.
4) In case of resetting CNC during rigid tapping, the motion will be stopped immediately,
and the rigid tapping mode will be released. But, the tapping mode (G84, G88) will
not be released. Tapping mode can be released by "G80".
(3) Cautions after executing

Command "G80" surely to release the tapping mode after completing the rigid tapping. In
case that tapping mode is not released, it can be occurred the malfunction of machine
because the spindle override is fixed at 100%.
2.5 Alarm & remedy related to the rigid tapping

Alarm
Message Cause & remedy
No.
Exceed the maximum spindle speed (r.p.m.).
200 ILLEGAL S-CODE COMMAND
(Check the parameter No. 5241 -5243)
FEED RATE NOT FOUND
201 Value is omitted. Modify the program.
RIGID TAP
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Spindle deviation is excessive.
PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID The position of "M29" or "S" command is
203
TAPPING incorrect.
Axis feed command is existed between "M29"
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION
and "G-eode".
G-eode has been executed without the signal of
205 RIGID SIGNAL Dl OFF
synchronous rigid tapping mode.
Axis plane is changed in synchronous rigid
206 CANNOT CHANGE PLANE
tapping mode.
Tap length is longer or shorter in synchronous
207 RIGID DATA MISS MATCH
rigid tapping.
SERVO ALARM n-AXIS Position deviation is too excessive when
410
EXCESS ERROR stopping. (Check parameter No. 5312)
SERVO ALARM n-AXIS Position deviation is too excessive when
411
EXCESS ERROR feeding. (Check parameter No. 5310 or 5314)
SERVO ALARM n-AXIS LSI
413 Register error is out of the range.
OVERFLOW
RIGID TAP ALARM EXCESS Position deviation of spindle is excessive when
740
ERROR tapping is moving
184 I Part3
Alarm
Message Cause & remedy
No.
RIGID TAP ALARM EXCESS Position deviation of spindle is excessive when
741
ERROR tapping is moving. (Check parameter No. 5241)
RIGID TAP ALARM LSI LSI overflow is occurred in spindle during
742
OVERFLOW tapping.
COMMAND M29 IN G96 M29 is commanded in G96 mode.
2025
MODE Command G97 to release the G96 mode.
3. Workpiece transfer & synchronous control
Right Spindle
Right Spindle
Left Spindle
spindle by A-axis and the

workpiece in left spindle is
transferred to right spindle.
3.1 Workpiece transfer introduction

As figure shown above, if a machine is equipped with left spindle and right spindle, it needs
to transfer the workpiece which is clamped at the chuck of left spindle to right spindle and
needs to clamp the workpiece.
According to the state of workpiece and machining condition, the methods to transfer the
workpiece are various. Among these, the synchronous control and torque skip function are
used to transfer the workpiece while the speed and phase of left spindle and right spindle
make same.
Normally right spindle is moved to left spindle by A-axis and the workpiece in left spindle is
transferred to right spindle.
PROGRAMMING I 185
3.2 Workpiece transferring method.
(1) Method 1
Synchronizing right spindle and left spindle, clamp the workpiece to both spindle while
both spindles are rotating. Cutting the center of workpiece and transfer the workpiece to
right spindle. This can be used when the workpiece is continuously supplied to left
chuck in the bar type.
(2) Method 2
Clamp the workpiece to both spindle when left and right spindle are stopped. And then
synchronizing left spindle and right spindle cut the center of workpiece and transfer the
workpiece to right spindle. This can be used when the workpiece is continuously supplied to
left chuck in the bar type.
(3) Method 3
Right spindle is moved to left spindle when both spindles are stopped and the
workpiece is transferred to right spindle. Spindle synchronous function is not used.
(4) Method 4
Synchronizing left spindle and right spindle, right spindle is moved to left spindle while
both spindles are rotating, and the workpiece is transferred to right spindle.
186 I Part3
3.3 Synchronous control & torque skip function
(1) Basic motion description
Synchronous control & torque skip function are used to transfer the workpiece between
both spindles while they are rotating.
1) Synchronous control
Synchronous control makes both spindle rotate at the same speed and/or phase,
that is, synchronizing both spindle and it is used to transfer the workpiece from left
spindle to right spindle. Synchronous control can be executed only the following one
method of the two. Synchronous control could be changed into 2 kinds of method
according to the status of left and right chuck.
Synchronous control Chuck status Synchronous element
Synchronous control of Both or one of L and R Synchronize the speed
the speed chuck are clamped only.
Synchronous control of One of L and R chuck is Synchronize the speed &
the speed & phase clamped phase.
C1&C2 Synchronous
Synchronize the C axis
control
Synchronous control of both spindles can be commanded and executed only by M-

eade in automatic mode, and spindle override command is available. Both spindles
are stopped during synchronizing and synchronous control mode is released as fol-
lows.
- M205 command makes both spindles stop.

- It is changed into manual mode (Handle, jog, reference point return mode).
- M02 or M30 is commanded.
-Pressing CNC reset switch during synchronous control
-Front door is opened. (Only when the door interlock is available)
2) Torque skip
To transfer the workpiece of left spindle to right spindle, right spindle will be moved
and adhered closely to left spindle. This is difficult to determine the adhere point
because the exact adhere point may differ according to the state of workpiece and
each workpiece.
Torque skip function checks the torque of A-axis that moves right spindle when right
spindle are adhered to left spindle. If the detected torque is greater than the torque
to be set, A-axis feed is stopped, executes the next block that moves to the reverse
direction. That is, torque skip function will skip the block which is working and
PROGRAMMING I 187
executes next block when the detected torque is greater than the set torque value.
At this time, torque that generates the skip is set to 0472.
I &CAUTION I
Be sure not to change the value of 0472. It may cause the malfunction of
machine.
(2) M-eade related to synchronous control & A-axis torque skip

1) M-eade related to synchronous control
I M203 Sxxxx P11 ;
Synchronizing the speed of left spindle and right spindle, rotate both spindle to CW
direction(M203) at the commanded speed(Sxxxx).
During spindle synchronous control, the left spindle becomes the master spindle and
spindle selection by P-code uses P11.
I M204 Sxxxx P11 ;
Synchronizing the speed of left spindle and right spindle, rotate both spindle to CCW
direction(M204) at the commanded speed(Sxxxx).
I M213 Sxxxx P11;
Synchronizing the speed and phase of left spindle and right spindle, rotate both
spindle to CW direction(M213) at the commanded speed(Sxxxx).
I M214 Sxxxx P11;
Synchronizing the speed and phase of left spindle and right spindle, rotate both
spindle to CCW direction(M214) at the commanded speed(Sxxxx).
I M205 P11;
Stop both spindle which are rotating to be synchronized at the same time.
I M31 ;(Left spindle bypass) I

Left chuck can be clamped I undamped during rotating.
In the state of unclamp, left spindle can be rotated. However, it is only available in
the automatic operation state.
I M131 ;(Right spindle bypass)
Right chuck can be clamped I undamped during rotating.

In the state of unclamp, right spindle can be rotated.
However, it is only available in the automatic operation state.
CD Cautions when commands M-eade related to synchronous control.
188 I Part3
According to the chuck clamp state of left spindle and right spindle, M-eade
related to synchronous control will be determined whether it works or not as
follows. If M-eade doesn't work after commanding, alarm 2114 will be occurred.
Chuck clamp condition M203, M204 command

If the speed & phase are synchronized, the
Left I right spindle is all clamped
command of M203 and M204 work.
Main I right spindle is all undamped The command of M203 and M204 don't work.
Either left spindle or right spindle is
The command of M203 and M204 work.
undamped
2) M-eade & G-eode related to torque

Right spindle
skip
I M86;
Make the torque skip function of A-

~
axis available.
Mainly it is used just before running G-
eode "G31" of the torque skip function.
I M87;
Left spindle
Make the torque skip function of A-
axis unavailable. ROTATING DIRECTION
Mainly it is used after completing the workpiece transfer between left spindle and
right spindle, that is, just after running G-eode "G31" of the torque skip function.
I G31 pgg A_F_;
If A-axis is carried the load(torque) more than the setting value during moving to the
commanded point (A_) at the commanded feed (F_ ), stops the movement and
executes the next block.
Normally "A_" is set more than 2-4mm inside comparing to the actual adhesion
point between left chuck and right chuck.
Torque value that will be occurred

I the skip is set to 0472. Be sure not
to change it because the optimum
I
I I
I
I
I
value had been set when shipping.
If this value is changed, it may
Left chuck Right chuck cause the malfunction of machine.
CD Cautions when commands M-eade related to torque skip

A. The torque skip function in the TT machine is available only in lower program
PROGRAMMING I 189
and after commanding "M86" (torque skip function available M-eade). never
move the axis by GOO (Rapid traverse). The torque value in rapid
acceleration/deceleration may be greater than the torque value which is
occurred by torque skip, this may cause the malfunction of machine. Be sure
to operate the rapid traverse only after inactivating the torque skip func-
tion(M87).
B. Move the A-axis using M86 and G31 after commanding M203 or M204, and if
the spindle override is too low when using the torque skip function, A-axis
may not be moved because the spindle speed reached signal is not confirmed.
At this time, check the state of spindle override.
3.4 Program example using synchronous control & torque skip function
There are 4 kinds of example for the machining program that transfer the workpiece from
left spindle to right spindle as follows.
(1) Method 1
Synchronizing left spindle and right spindle, clamp the workpiece to both chuck while
both spindles are rotating. Cut the center of workpiece, transfer the workpiece to right
spindle. This can be used that the workpiece continuously supplied to left chuck in the
bar type.
Program Description
M131 ; Rotate right spindle under the unclamp state of right chuck.
M169; Unclamp right chuck.
M203S_P11; Synchronizing right spindle and left spindle rotate to CW direction.
GOOA_, Move right spindle to the front of left spindle using A-axis.
M86; Activate the torque skip function.
A-axis is moved by the commanded feed, left spindle and right
spindle is adhered, and if A-axis is carried the load (torque) more
G31 P99 A_F_,
than the setting value, stops the movement of A-axis and
M87; Make the torque skip function unavailable.
M168; Clamp right chuck.
M31 ; Main chuck can be undamped during the rotation of left spindle.
M69; Unclamp left chuck.
GOOA_, Move A-axis for cutting the workpiece.
M68; Clamp left chuck.
G01 x_z_, Cut the workpiece
190 I Part 3
(2) Method 2
Clamp the workpiece to both chuck while both spindles are stopped. And then synchro-
nizing left spindle and right spindle, cut the center of workpiece, and transfer the work-
piece to right spindle. This can be used that the workpiece continuously supplied to left
chuck in the bar type.
Program Description
M131 ; Rotate right spindle under the undamp state of right chuck.
M169; Undamp right chuck.
G31 P99 A_F_;
M31; Main chuck can be undamped during the rotation of left spindle.
M69; Undamp left chuck.
GOOA_, Move A-axis for cutting the workpiece.
M68; Clamp left chuck.
M203S_ P11; Synchronizing left spindle and right spindle rotate to CW direction.
G01 X_Z_, Cut the workpiece
(3) Method 3
Right spindle is moved to left spindle when both spindles are stopped and the
workpiece is transferred to right spindle. Spindle synchronous function is not used.
Program Description
M131 ; Rotate right spindle under the undamp state of right chuck.
M169; Undamp right chuck.
G31 P99 A_F_;
M69; Undamp left chuck.
GOOA_, Move A-axis for next cutting.
PROGRAMMING I 191
(4) Method 4
Synchronizing left spindle and right spindle, right spindle is moved to left spindle while
both spindles are rotating, and the workpiece is transferred to right spindle.
Program Description
M131 ; Rotate right spindle under the unclamp state of right chuck.
M169; Unclamp right chuck.
M203S_P11; Synchronizing right spindle and left spindle, rotate to CW direction.
G31 P99 A_F_,
M69; Unclamp left chuck.
GOOA_, Move A-axis for next cutting.
(5) Method
Synchronizing left spindle and right spindle, it is used to supply and cut workpiece
Program Description
In order to Synchronize, right spindle is required reference point
M35;
return of C axis.
M628 HO.; Reference point return of C axis
M135; Change into left spindle of C axis mode.
M35; Command C1 axis again.
M136; Command C1&C2 Synchronous control mode
...... Cutting program or supplying work piece is executed .
M137; C1 &C2 Synchronous control mode finish
192 I Part 3
3.5 Alarm and remedy related to synchronous control and torque skip
Alarm No. Message Cause & remedy
There is no command of traverse in G31 P99
TOO MANY AXES
015 block. Or it has been commanded more than two
COMMANDED
axes. Command only one axis.
It can not be returned to the commanded position
244 P/S ALARM because the servo deviations are greater than
32767 after completing of G31 P99
It is commanded the rapid traverse after M86
411 SERVO ALARM : n AX
command. Modify the program.
M203 or M204 has been commanded under the
state that left chuck & right chuck are all undamped.
SYNCHRONOUS
2114 Or M213 or M214 has been commanded under
COMMAND ALARM
the state that left chuck and right chuck are all
clamped. Check the state of chuck.
PROGRAMMING I 193
4. Polygon turning function {option)
Polygon turning function can be used to machine the polygonal shape by rotating the work-
piece and Rev. spindle at a fixed rate. Using C-axis and X-axis, polygon turning can be
machined more easily and quickly than Polar Coordinate Interpolating Function. Normally
polygon turning function is used to make the hexagonal bolt or nut.
It is possible to change the shape of the workpiece into a rectangle or hexagon by changing
the rotation rate of workpiece and Rev.spindle tool, number of cutters.
Polygon turning will be executed with left spindle and upper Rev.spindle tool in system 1,
and right spindle and lower Rev.spindle tool in system 2.
194 I Part3
4.1 Command method related to polygon turning
(1) M-eade related to polygon turning
I M28 Sxxxx Poo;
Change into polygon turning mode.

Set the rotational speed of spindle(master axis) and select the master spindle for polygon
turning.
"M28 SxxxxP11": Polygon turning between left spindle and live tool spindle
"M28 SxxxxP21": Plolygon turning between right spindle and live tool spindle.
M28 SxxxxPoo is not command for rotation of actual spindle but for setting rotational
speed of master axis. Actual spindle will rotate after "G51.2" is commanded.
(2) G-eode related to polygon turning
I G51.2P_Q_;
P: Setting the rotation rate in left spindle(Master axis). (Range : 1-3)
Q: Setting the rotation rate in milling tool (polygon synchronization axis).(Range : 2-6)
If "G51.2 P_ Q_" is commanded after M28 command, Each spindle start to rotate
immediately.
G50.2;
Release the polygon turning mode.

If "G50.2" is commanded during spindle rotation in the polygon turning mode, spindle
stops instantaneously and Milling tool also stops immediately.
I&CAUTIONI
1. If C-axis traverse is commanded in the next block after "G50.2" command, alarm
"197" is occurred. Be sure not to command the C-axis traverse command in the next
block of "G50.2".
4.2 Example of polygon turning program

Program Description
M34;
Turn C1-axis selection OFF, and select spindle mode.
TOOLL , Select milling tool (Cutter)

M28 S1000P11(21) , Set the rotational speed for left(right) spindle
Left spindle and milling tool start to rotate.
G51.2 P1 Q4;
The rotational speed of left/main spindle is 1000 r.p.m ..
The rotational speed of milling tool is 2000 r.p.m ..
PROGRAMMING I 195
Program Description
G01 z_ F_, Start the cutting.
GOOX_,
Move the tool to safety area after completing the cutting.
G50.2; Release the polygon turning mode.

TooD.D. , Select another tool for another cutting
Above example program will be machined with hexagonal-type if the cutter of milling tool is
3 pieces.
4.3 Alarm & remedy related to polygon turning

Alarm No. Message Cause & remedy
There is C-axis traverse command in next block of
C AXIS COMMAND IN
197 "G50.2"
SPINDLE MODE
Modify the program.
NOT FOUND P/Q Q or Pis not assigned in "G51.2" block.
218
COMMAND IN G251 Modify the program.
G51.2/G251 and G50.1 I G250 have been
COMMAND G250/G251 commanded with another command in the same
219
INDEPENDENTLY block.
Modify the program.
C-axis traverse has been commanded in polygon
ILLEGAL COMMAND
221 turning mode.
INSYNCHRO
Modify the program.
POLYGON SPINDLE Don't rotate at the speed to be set by "G51.2"
5018
SPEED command during polygon turning.
4.4 Restrictions in polygon turning mode

(1) The following operations are restricted during polygon turning mode.
- C-axis operation
-Tool index operation
-Normal operation for spindle rotation (M03, M04, M33, M34 etc.)
-Spindle output changeover operation (Y-Delta output connection changeover)
(2) If feed hold or single block alarm have occurred in polygon turning mode, axis does not
stop. But, when operating the feed hold switch or single block switch in operation panel,
the corresponding functions will be activated correctly.
(3) If the front door is opened in polygon turning mode, the polygon turning mode will be
released.
(4) The maximum speed of spindle in the polygon turning mode is 2000 r.p.m. When
exceeding this speed, alarm 5018 is occurred.
196 I Part 3
Part 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Automatic operation means that machine works not by a operator but by a program made of
M, S, T, G-eode and axis feeding commands.
1. Program make & modify

In order to operate a machine automatically, automatic operation program should be made.
Regarding to more detail explanation, refer to the FANUC OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
(1) Upper I Lower unit selection
In first, select upper or lower unit by pressing switch located in

left side on operation panel to make automatic operation
program.
(2) Selecting edit mode
In first, select EDIT mode by pressing switch located in left side of operation
panel. If "EDIT" mode is selected normally, then "EDIT" will be displayed in
the left-bottom side of LCD monitor.
(3) Switch to program screen
CZl Program screen
® Program soft key
CDProgram switch
CDPress "PROG" switch in MDI
AUTOMATIC OPERATION I 197

operation panel located in the right side of LCD monitor.
~Program screen will be displayed as follows.
@Press "PROGRAM" soft switch, then program screen will become full screen.
(4) Program protect switch release

Turn the switch, which is shown left, in operation panel. This will
release program protect function of CNC. With•out turning the switch,
which is shown left, to ON posi•tion, program cannot be modified. But
according to the program no., there are occasions that program cannot
PROGRAM
PORTECT be modified regardless of switch shown in left side.
Program No. 8000 - 8999 : In case that parameter No. 3202.#0 is set
to "1", edit impossible.
Program No. 9000 - 9999 : In case that parameter No. 3202.#4 is set
to "1", edit impossible.
(5) Machining program structure

Regarding to more detail explanation, refer to the FANUC OPERATOR'S MANUAL
CD Program No.
CZl Program description
I]) Program
C5l Sequence No.
1) Program NO.
Each program has its No. and it is impossible to register program that has same
program No .. Program No. can select to use any number between 0 - 9999 without
duplication. But some No. between 9000 - 9999 are used to operate machine, thus
in case of using these No., it needs to pay attention.
198 I Part 4
2) Program Description
In order to expect the contents of program by registered No., it is possible to enter a
simple description regarding to the programs.
Regarding to the programs, surely enter a simple description in round brackets ( ).
Description can be omitted.
3) Program
The machine operation is defined for actual machining. Program consists of M, S, T,
G-eode and axis feeding command as follows.
S-code ; Set the rotating speed of spindle and angle of orientation.

T-code; Assign tool No. and offset No.
G-eode ; Assign axis feeding of machine and machining cycle automatically.
In general, M, S, T and axis feeding command are used in a same block but cannot
use twice.
That is, M-eade cannot use twice in a block.
4) EOB
It means "End Of Block", and signifies a block has been finished.
In case that CNC program reads and executes machining program, program will be
executed block by block.
Read a block and command in the block is not finished yet, the program cannot
advance to the next block.
5) Sequence No.
Each of blocks is often controlled with sequence No .. Sequence No. is not
mandatory.
Sequence No. would use 0- 9999 without duplication.
6) Program finish
Program should check its end part using M-eade as follows.
M02;
M30;
If M02 or M30 is used in program, the program is finished. Thus in order to restart
the program, automatic operation start should be commanded one more time. But is
case of M99, program will be restarted from the top of the program.

(6) Machining program register
When making a new program, the program must first be registered. Before registering
the program, check the currently registered program numbers in the NC Folder and do
not register a No. already in use in the same folder. However, if the same program No.
is not in a different folder, then registration is possible.
PROGRAM FOLDER
00018 N00000 1) Press soft key "FOLDER" and
FOREGR£LI.ID FOLDER /CHC_tEH/USER/PRTHl/TESTCUT /
:mCKGROUND FOLDER /OICJ£H/USER/PRTH1/I NSPECT / the current NC program folder
will appear. On the left is the NC
HTB2
SYSTEH
<HLDER>
<FOLDER>
program display of the upper
folder. In the upper folder, 4
folders, MTB1, MTB2, SYSTEM,
and USER are provided.
Depending on USER, additional
folders can be added. Move to
USER/PATH1/ TESTCUT
FOLDER for program registration.
01000 N00000 2) Move to

FOREGROUND FOLDER /CHCJEH/lJSER/PRTH1/TESTCUT /
mCKGROUHD FOLDER /CHCJEH/lJSER/PRTHi/1 HSPECT /
USER/PATH1/TESTCUT
EIJICE CHC_HEH ( CURRENT FOLDER /USER/PRTHl/TESTCUT/ ) FOLDER List of programs in the
folder appears.
01000 N00000
r==:::-==-;::;;::;;;:;:;:;:;;;;;;::;;;:;;:;;~~:=:.::-:::=:~:::::::::=-l 3) In the command line, enter the
PROGRRH FOLDER
FOREGR~D FOLDER /Oic_~HAJSER/PATHi/TESTCUT /
:mCKGRlLtm FOLDER /CHC_t'EHAJSER/PRTHl/1 NSPECT / program number as follows.

~
USED PAGE J63[k8YTEl USED FILES
FREE PAGE 174U<:BYTE1 FREE FILES I
RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER <FOLDER>

?118 2[KBVTEl 2008/BS/82 18 18: 54 Ex) 00020
71211 l[KBYTEl 2908/05/82 18 21:48
00001 l[KBVTEl 2008/BS/88 13 83: 82
00002 l[KBYTEl 2008/05/00 13 11: 26 After entering the program No.,
00003 l[KBYTEl 2008/05/00 13 13: 86
00004 l[KBVTEl 2008/BS/BB 13 16: dB
00005 l[KBYTEl 2008/05/00 13 28: 18 press soft key "CREATE
00006 l[KBVTEl 2008/BS/88 13 23: 88
00007 l[KBYTEl 2BOBI'H5/BB 13 26: 28
00008 1[KBYTEl 2BOB/051'00 13 27: 12 PROGRAM"
00009 1[KBYTEl 2BOB1'051'00 13 27: Sd
00018 1[KBYTEl
200 Part 4
00020 N00000 4) If "INPUT" is pressed in the MDI
Soft key, a new program can be
made.
PROGRAH FOLDER
00018 N00000 5) When deleting a registered
FOREGROOtiD FI1.DER /CHC_HEH/USER/PATHi/TESTCUT /
RH>::EiRlJJND FII_DER /CHC_I'EI1/USER/PATH1/IHSPECT /
USED FILES ~
program, press Soft key "DELETE".
FREE FILES I521
00018 N00000 6) When deleting a registered

FDREiiRliJND FII_DER /CHC_tEIVUSER/PATHi/TESTCUT /
BACkliRliJND FI1.D ER /CHC_tEt1/USER/PATH1/IHSPECT /
program move the cursor and
USED PAGE 364IKDVTEl
FREE PAGE 1?3IKDYTEl
select the program to be deleted
and press "EXEC" Soft key.
Example) 00020
A>'
DELETE PROGRAH ?
=
PROGRfiH FOLDER
E1JLITJU
FD~IiRlJJND FII_DE~ ~.ICNC_tEH/LJSEJV'PATHi/TESTCUT /
00018
BflCk:fiR(lJtffi FII_DER r/CHC_tEH/LJSEJl/PATHi/IHSPECT /
N00~
7) 00020 in TESTCUT folder has
USED PflliE I J63IKB'l' TEI USED FILES ~

been deleted.
Fli!EE PAiiE 1?4IKB'l'TE1 FREE FILES I522
~=~~: i~~~~:~~
00811 liKB'r'TEI
00812 lii<BYTEI
00815 liKB'I'TEl 2008.105/86 28: 00: 58
00816 liKBYTEI 2008.1[)5.18? 11:41:80
0081? llkBVTE1 2008/ffi/B? 14: 42: 34
., 00818 liKB'r'TEI 2008/BS.IB? 16: 4?: :m
001156 19IKBYTE1 2008.105.1112 13: 1]5: 112
00183 llkBVTEI 200B/BS/B2 13: OS: 82
001{)4 liKB'r'TEI 2008/85.182 13: BS: 82
OOHI? liKBYTEI 2008/ffi./IJ2 13: H5: 82 -
00108 l[I<B'iTE1 2009/ffi/82 l3: BS: 82
OlOOB l[I<B'r'TE1 2008/85/82 l3: B5: 82
Ol5(UJ l[I<B'r'TE1 2008/ffi./82 l3: H5: 82 v
JA>'
AUTOMATIC OPERATION 201

1.1 Machining program modification
Registered program can be modified using switches in MDI operation panel.
Move cursor to the part to be modified and then enter new command or delete.
INSERT switch : In case of entering new command.

DELETE switch: In case of deleting existing command.
ALTER switch : In case of altering existing command to newly entered command.
During the automatic operation, basically it is impossible to alter the machining program,
but when using "Back Groung Edit", program can be altered.
(1) Back Ground Edit function

Press [OPRT] in program screen, then press [BG-EDT] and it becomes Back Ground
Edit state. In this state, program can be altered regardless of automatic operation. After
completing program alteration in 'Back Ground Edit' state, this state must be ended by
pressing [OPRT] followed by [BG-END] on the program display.
202 I Part 4
1.2 Registered program call
Call the program to be executed among the registered programs, and then the program can
be executed normally.
PROGRAH FOLDER
01000 N00000 1) Among the programs registered in
r:::::~::~~~;
~;-~~
;;~
~E;R~
~AT~H~11;T;,
ES;TC;U;TI~~~~~~~~~~-~
I'CHC_l'EH/LJSE~/PATHLII HSPECT / TESTCUT FOLDER in order to call
USED PAGE 36J[KBVTE1
FREE PAiiE 174[KDYTE1 00020 program input 00020 in the
RETlli!H TO l.FPER FOLDER
7110
<FOLDER>
2IKBYTE1
command line and press the Soft
?120 HkB'I'TEl
08001
00002
HKBYTE1
HI&I'TEl
key "PROGRAM SEARCH" Key.
OBOOJ HKB'I'TEl
08004 HKBYTEl
08005 HI<B'I'TEl
08006 HKBYTEl
0800? HI<B'l'TEl
08008 1IKBYTE1 2'000/85/BB lJ:Z/:12
08009 HKBYTEl 2888/85/BB 13: 2?: 5d
08818 HI<:BYTE1
PROGRAH FOLDER
00018 N00000 2) To call 00020 program and execute
Flli!EiiROlloiD fll._DER
BACk6ROLirn f[J_DER
/~_I'EHIUSEIU'PATH1/TESTCUT I
/O«:_I'EH/LJSBUPATH1/IHSPECT/
automatic operation, press the Soft
USED PRiiE
FREE PRiiE
364[KBVTE1
1?3[KBVTE1
key "MAIN PROGRAM".
I I •
08011 HKB"ITEl
08812 HKB"ITEl 2000/85/86 16: 31: d.2
08015 HKBVTEl 28118/85/116 28' 00' 5S
08816 HKB"ITEl
0801? HKBVTEl
~ 08018 HKB"ITEl
00820 HKB"ITEl 2000/85/13 28: 48 : 16
081l56 19[KB"ITE1
08103 HKB"ITEl
001114 HKB"ITEl
0810? HKBVTEl
08100 HKBVTEl
01008 HKB"ITEl
PROGRAH FOLDER
00020 N00000 3) In front of the 00020 program, "@"
FOREGROLtiD FOLDE~ ~/CNC_tEHAISER/PATHl/TESTCUT?
BACKGRWHD FOLDE~ 1//CNC_tEHI'USER/PATHl/l NSPECT I' is shown and it is a program called
USED PAiiE I 36d.IKBYTE1 USED FILES ~
FREE PAGE 173IKBYTE1 FREE FILES I521
during automatic operation.
00011
00012
HKDYTEl
HKDVTEl ::::::::: !~: ~~: :~ 1!:
2900/BS/06 2B: 88: 58
00015 HKD'iTEl
00016 HKB'iTEl 2000/BS/B? 11: dl: 88
0001? HKD'iTEl 2898/95/B? 1d.: d2: Jd.
II"~::~: HKU"U
HKB'I'TE1
"""""""'""' 10' " ' " "
2000/95/13 20:40:16
08103
08104
HKB'iTE1
HKDVTE1 ~001~182
2800/95/92 13
13 85' "11t
85: 82
08187 HKDVTE1 20981"95/92 13 85: 82
08188 HKDVTE1 2800/95/92 13 85: 82
01008 HKDVTE1 28981'95/82 13 EJ5: 82 v
AUTOMATIC OPERATION 203

2. Automatic operation run
(1) Automatic program running mode
There are 3 kinds of machine mode to execute automatic operation as follows.
Operation Switch Mode

c:::::::::)
~
[MEM mode]
It is the mode to execute program saved in CNC.
M
c:::::::::)
[MDI mode]
~ It is the mode to execute temporary single command which entered
MDI by operator.
204 I Part 4
(2) Automatic operation start condition
In order to do automatic operation, there are some conditions which should be satisfied as
follows.
1) Machine ready
The machine should be in Machine ready state.
2) REF. PT. return

After on the power of machine, once at least,
execute the 1st Ref. Pt. return in manual. -
However, in case that servo system is absolute
type, Ref. Pt. return isn't necessary.
system is ABS
Type?
3) Chuck
In order to execute automatic operation, chuck
should be in clamp state. However, according to
the type of machine, there are some occasions to
execute automatic operation regardless of clamp
state of chuck.
-Gantry loader equipment etc.
4) Front door
Only in case that the front door of machine is
closed, automatic operation is possible.
5) Alarm of machine
Automatic operation can be executed when all of
the alarms are released.
However, among PMC alarm with No. 2000's,
when simple message alarm occurs, automatic
Select mode for automatic
onl"rl'llion operation is possible to be executed without
releasing the alarm.
Regarding more detail operation about above explanation, refer to the relevant
operation manual.

(3) Automatic operation run in MEM mode
If all of the conditions mentioned above are satisfied, execute automatic operation thru
following operation.
~ [Select EDIT mode]

In first, complete to call or alter program desired to be executed.
1 ?:2 Check the cursor is in the start point where program starts.
EDIT Press reset switch in MDI operation panel, then cursor move to
the top of the program.
~
UPPER
0
lit:
[U-UNIT]
rn
~ [Select U, U/L or L unit]
Select U unit in case of upper program, and select L unit in case
of lower program, and select U/L unit in case that upper and
2 ~ lower unit execute the program at the same time. However, the
program execution is possible only if in MEM operation mode. If
[U/L-UNIT] not, the lamp of U/L unit switch will be flickering.
~
LOWER
0·:w
[L-UNIT]
~
[Select MEM mode]

3 ~ Select MEM mode.
MEM
[Check the state of switch relating with axis & spindle override in
operation panel]
4
Check the states of spindle override, axes feedrate and rapid
override. That is, check whether its states are correct or not.
[Check the state of all switches and lamps in operation panel]
Check the states of single block, optional block skip, optional
5
stop and dry run switches. Check whether the setting is correct
or not.
[Check the state of machine one more time]
6 Check the state of machine one more time. That is, by starting
automatic operation, check whether interferences occur or not.
~ <]>
7
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
[Press cycle start switch]
Machine starts automatic operation by program when releasing
the cycle start switch in operation panel after pressing the switch.
START]
206 I Part 4
(4) Automatic operation run in MDI mode
When the conditions for automatic operation are satisfied, MDI automatic operation will be
started thru the operation as follows.
[Select MDI mode]

Press MDI mode selecting switch to change the mode.
00000 N00000 2) Press MDI Key " PROGRAM" and
the display in the left figure will

appear.
G99 Gl'id G1'5

G21 G1B GBS. 5 5
G22 GSB. 2600.4

s 8
ACTUAL POSIT I ON
00000 N00000
ABSOLUTE F 0 I 3) After
HH/HIN
inputting the command,
1200 • 000 I~P~AR~TS~W~U~NT~--------~~12~19
633 • 477 ~~~~~~HE i 50H i OH SS
which will be executed, check the
0.0001 ------~------1 switches and various state of the
0 • 000 f"'800 H03 5188 Pll'
0. 000 ' machine of the control panel and
HODAL check for any errors that my occur
669
6 99
654
664
649
615
D
HD. T JOOBB
when executing the command
621 618 GBS. 5 5 8
""· T
.
640 G69. 1G54. 4
625 G4B. 1GBO. 5
622 GSB. 2GBO. 4
s ~
4) [Press cycle start switch]

Machine starts automatic operation by program when pressing and
CYCLE START
then releasing the cycle start switch.
[CYCLE
START]

3. Auxiliary functions in automatic operation
(1) Single block
During single block function is used, automatic operation will be finished after one block
execution. In order to execute program continuously, press Cycle Start switch each
time a block is finished.
In general, single block function is used for checking program.
c:::::::::)
[Select Single Block]

1 ~ Press single block switch, then "ON" the single block function.
SINGLE
BLOCK The function becomes ON normally, then switch lamp is ON.
~ <]>
2
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
[Execute Automatic Operation]
Press and release cycle start switch as shown in left-side figure,
program will execute only a block. Whenever automatic
operation is executed, cycle start switch must be pressed.
START]
In program using MACRO statement, the parameter setting decides that single block
function is valid or not.
Parameter Set "0" Single block is not valid in MACRO statement.

No.6000.#5 Set "1" Single block is valid in MACRO statement.
Set "0" Single block is not valid in MACRO statement.
Parameter
Single block is available in MACRO statement
No.6000.#7 Set "1"
which doesn't use #3003 variable.
I&CAUTIONI
1. During the thread cutting, single block function doesn't work immediately.
After completing cutting process, regardless of thread cutting, automatic operation
will stop by single block function after executing the first block.
2. During fixing cycle, single block function doesn't work immediately.
From the point where actual machining is completed, automatic operation will stop
by single block function.
208 I Part 4
(2) Optional block skip
Without executing a specific block in program, execute the next block.
It can be used for condition of machining or convenience of operation in program.
[Program Modification]
1 Input "/" into the block that doesn't want to be executed as
/MOO; shown in left-side figure.
~<]>
2
DCYCLE START
[CYCLE
[Executing Automatic Operation]
Press and release cycle start switch, then program will be
started.
START]
[Select Optional Block]
c:::::::J If one presses the left-side switch before executing the block
that has"/", the lamp in switch is ON.
1 0) The block that has "/" isn't executed and the next block is
OPTIONAL
BLOCK SKIP
executed.
If left-side switch is pressed during executing of the block
that has"/", skip doesn't occur.
I &CAUTION!
1. Optional Block Skip function can use 9 kinds of function from 2 to 9 except Optional
Block Skip 1 using "/" shown above. And it is option function except 1.
Optional Block Skip function can be used with the mode such as "/2", "/3", "/ 4", "/5",
"/6", "17'', "/8", "/9".
2. Optional Block Skip 1-9 can be used to duplicate in a block.
When Optional Block Skip 1 is used with any other Optional Block Skip in a block,
"/1" should be used instead of"/".
(3) Optional stop

Optional stop can be used in case of hold and restart the program in automatic
operation at the block of MOO or M01. That is, it can be used for checking the state of
tool or cutting after a specific cutting process.
1) M-eade for Optional Stop

MOO ; MOO performs its function regardless of the operation state of Optional Stop
switch in operation panel.
M01 ; M01 performs its function only when Optional Stop switch is pressed in opera-
tion panel.

2) Machine state changing when MOO, M01 (Optional Stop Switch "ON") is executed
- Spindle rotating and coolant operation stop
- In case of the machine using safety switch, during the automatic operation, the
front door is closed. In Optional Stop state, the front door can be opened.
- Chuck cannot be operated by foot switch during automatic operation. In optional
Stop state, chuck can be operated by foot switch.
- After changing manual mode, It is possible to rotate spindle in manual.
- Optional Stop lamp is ON in operation panel.
- MOO, M01 cannot be finished and maintain wait state until cycle start switch is
pressed again.
3) Finish of MOO, M01

MOO, M01 will be finished when cycle start switch is pressed, and then the next
block is executed normally.
According to the state of keep relay, stopped spindle and coolant when MOO, M01
are executed, will be decided whether it will rotate or stop without additional
command.
Spindle and coolant, which are stopped when MOO, M01 are
commanded, maintain its stop status until automatic operation
Set "0" is started after finishing MOO, M01.
In order to operate spindle and coolant, additional command is
required.
K3.4
Spindle and coolant which are stopped when MOO, M01 are
executed, restart its operation with the state as before when
Set "1" automatic operation is restarted.
In order to operate spindle and coolant, additional command is
not required.
210 I Part4
4) Executing MOO, M01
On Automatic Operation On Automatic Operation
Executing MOO
[ Executing M01
l
Automatic Operation Hold
NO
Executing required aerating
Press cycle start switch
OPTIONAL
STOP
Press Optional stop

NO
switch then the lamp in
switch is ON.
And it is possible to use
t YES
M01 as optional stop
function.
Stopped spindle and coolant

restarts its operating with the state
as before.
Automatic operation restarted from

the next block of MOO ~+----'

(4) Dryrun
Axis will feed at the separated dry run speed not the feed rate set in program, and pro-
gram will be executed.
In case of checking program without actual cutting, it will be used.
1) Command method
c:::::::::)
In operation panel, press the switch shown in left side, then the machine
±)~ becomes dry run state. If the machine becomes dry run state during
DRY RUN automatic operation, the axis will feed at dry run speed not commanded feed
iJ...==...!I
rate. And program will be executed.
2) Dry run speed

In case of commanding dry run during automatic operation, axis feed rate will be
decided with commanded state as follows.
- On rapid feeding command such as GOO etc., the axis will feed rapidly as follows.
In case of pressing manual rapid feed switch : Rapid feeding X Rapid override %In
case of not pressing manual rapid feed switch : Rapid feeding X Rapid override %
- On cutting feeding command such as G01 etc., the axis will feed at dry run speed
(1200mm/min).
In case of pressing manual rapid feeding switch :
Dry Run speed (1200mm/min) X 6.5534
In case of not pressing manual rapid feed switch :
Dry Run speed (1200mm/min) X Feedrate override%
212 I Part 4
3) Dry run function restriction
According to the keep relay setting as follows, there are some restriction in
executing dry run function.
In case of pressing dry run switch, dry run function will be
Set "0"
executed during automatic operation without any restrictions.
K2.7 According to the setting state of current feedrate override, dry
Set "1" run will be restricted, and separated warning will occur in its first
execution.
In case of setting K2.7 into "1", dry run will be executed as follows .
.------I~ I Dry Run executed Lamp in Dry

Run Switch is ON
(5) Manual handle retrace function (option)

In this function, the program can be executed both forward and backward with a manual
handle (manual pulse generator) under automatic operation.
Therefore, errors of a program, interference, and so on can be checked easily by
working a machine actually.
1) Command method
c:::::::::)
~ it is necessary to change the mode to the memory mode .
~
~ <]>
D
CYCLE START
[CYCLE
In MEM mode, push the cycle start button, then mode will be change to
the CHECKING MODE from manual handle retrace states.
START]
This function makes synchronizing with a pulse generated by a manual handle in the
checking mode. As a result, it becomes possible to check the program forward or

backward with a manual handle.
2) Status display
In manual handle retrace, the status of manual handle retrace is displayed on clock
display of CNC state display line. This status display is displayed during the
execution of manual handle retrace.
00123 N00000
0
"
11
II
IN
3) Forward movement and backward movement with a manual handle

The program is executed forward when a manual handle is turned
to the positive direction. And, the program is executed backward
when a manual handle is turned to the negative direction.
The program is executed backward as soon as a manual handle is
turned to the negative direction in executing the program forward.
When a manual handle keeps being turned in a negative direction,
the program is executed backward and the execution stops in the
block of 0 number. Then, if a manual handle is turned to the positive direction, the
program is executed forward again.
4) Program end
When the block of M2 or M30 is executed, the manual handle retrace ends. It is not
possible to execute the program backward from the block of M2 or M30.
214 I Part 4
5) Function cancel
When the 'cycle start button' is pushed again, then checking mode will be released
and program will be exeucted automatically in MEM mode.
If you push the TAPE' button again, manual handle retrace function will be released.
I ihCAUTIONI
1. During the checking mode, it is no possible to change the parameter and offset.
2. Dry-run can't operate during the checking mode. Dry-run signal must be set to "0".
3. On the PMC axis control, the backward movement of the program is prohibited.
(6) Machine lock

The commanded axis feeding and M, S,T-code are not executed actually, CNC will
operate normally. In case of checking the program without any machine operation, it will
be used.
1) Command method
There is no commanding method in manual. Machine lock can be commanded using
following M-eade.
M17 ; The machine will become machine lock state.
M18; The machine will be released from machine lock state.
I ihCAUTIONI
1. Machine lock command does work normally by commanding in MDI mode.
Therefore, command M17 and M18 in MDI mode.
2) Machine state after commanding machine lock

In general, if machine lock is commanded, both of automatic and manual operation
are possible as before commanding. However when operating and commanding
axis feed, the axis of machine is moving in monitor but actually the axis doesn't
move.
In addition, keep relay setting decides auxiliary function such as M, S, T-code to lock.
[Lock feeding axes only in machine]

-Regardless of machine mode, machine lock lamp is ON.
-When operating and commanding axes feeding, axes move in
K2.0 Set "0"
monitor but actually don't move.
- Regardless of machine mode, when M, S, T-code is com-
manded, commanded part will be executed normally.

[Lock feeding axes and M, S, T-code in machine]
- Only in MEM mode, machine lock lamp in operation panel is
blink. In other mode, the lamp maintains its ON status.
-When operating and commanding axes feeding, axes move in
Set "1"
monitor but actually don't move.
-In MEM mode, when commanding M, S, T-code, commanded
part will be finished without actual executing. However, it will be
operated normally in MDI mode.
3) Machine state after releasing machine lock

In general, in order to operate automatic operation, first of all, release machine lock
and execute the 1st reference point return.
But in case of setting Keep Relay as follows, it is possible to execute automatic
operation without reference point return after releasing the machine lock. However in
this case, collision of machine may occur because of difference between actual axis
position and coordinate system
After releasing the machine lock, reference point return of all
Set "0" axes that can be usable should be completed in order to
execute automatic operation.
K3.1
After releasing the machine lock, automatic operation is
Set "1" possible without reference point return of all axes that can be
usable.
216 I Part4
4. Automatic operation stop
Automatic operation will be finished by a operation as follows.
(1) Emergency stop

In case of pressing emergency stop switch in operation panel,
automatic operation will be stopped as follows.
- Automatic operation stops
- Feeding and rotating of all axes and spindle stop instantly.
- Rotation of turret stop instantly.
- Hydraulic pump and coolant motor stop.
As stated above, all of the manual and automatic operation are
impossible in emergency stop state. In order to release above
state and execute automatic operation, machine ready should be
done.
(2) Feed hold
In case of pressing feed hold switch in operation panel, automatic operation will be stopped as
follows.
Automatic operation stops. Cycle start lamp is OFF and the lamp of feed
hold switch is ON. When automatic operation stops, axes feeding also
stops instantly and M, T-code will be stop after finishing its operation.
CYCLE STOP
[CYCLE
STOP]
However, when program in progress executes fixing cycle for thread
cutting or tapping, axes feeding doesn't stop. Automatic operation will be stopped after
finishing actual machining part.
- Keep relay setting decides whether spindle and coolant stop or not.
Set "0" Feed hold operates but spindle and coolant don't stop.
Feed hold operates and spindle & coolant stop.
K3.0 However, in case of executing fixing cycle for thread cutting or
Set "1"
tapping, operation will be stopped after finishing actual
machining part.
Press and release cycle start switch in feed hold state, then the lamp of feed hold switch is
OFF and the lamp of cycle start switch is ON. And restart automatic operation from
stopped point.
I &CAUTION!
1. The machine may become feed hold state with alarm because of machine error.
Automatic operation will be restarted normally after eliminating the cause of alarm.

(3) CNC reset switch
In case of pressing CNC reset switch in left-upper side of MDI operation
RESET panel, automatic operation will be stopped as follows.
-Automatic operation stops instantly.

-All of the axes and spindle stop instantly.
-Automatic commanded coolant stops.
- M, S, T-code will be finished by compulsion without completing its operation.
However, turret completes its commanded operation regardless ofT-code finishing.
Press cycle start switch after stopping automatic operation by pressing CNC reset
switch, but automatic operation cannot be executed.
In order to restart automatic operation, first of all, check the start point of program and
release the alarm by changing into another mode.
(4) M02/M03 command

M02/M03 can finish program normally, used in the end of machining program.
M02 ; Simply finish the program.

M03 ; Finish the program and return cursor to the top of the program.
In case of the machine applied parts count function, whenever the M-eade shown
above is executed, the count value increases by one.
(5) MOO/M01 command

MOO I M01 are mainly used to stop program at arbitrary position and check the state of
machine and workpiece during machining program.
More detail explanation, refer to optional stop function in "1.3 Auxiliary functions in
automatic operation".
218 I Part4
Part 5 APPENDIX
1. M - CODE LIST PUMA TT series

o: Standard i;:r: Option f;}: Multi M-eade available
Meade Description Upper Lower Remark

MOO Program PAUSE 0 0
M01 Optional STOP 0 0
M02 Program END 0 0
M03 Spindle C.W rotation 0 0 Command with P
code
M04 Spindle C.C.W rotation 0 0 Left- P11, Right-
P21
Upper milling P12
M05 Spindle stop 0 0 Lower milling P22
@
M06
M07 High pressure coolant(cooljet) ON @
M08 Coolant On
*
0
*
0 @
M09 Coolant Off 0 0 @
Parts catcher advance (TT1518)
M10 @
Parts
Parts
unloader down (TT2025)
catcher retract (TT1518)
* *
M11 @
M12
Parts unloader retract (TT2025)
Parts unloader retract
* * @ TT1518
M13
* *
M14 Air blow(left chuck) On @
M15 Air blow(left chuck) Off
* * @
M16
* *
M17 Machine lock function On 0 0
M18 Machine lock function Off 0 0
M19 Left spindle orientation 0 0 @
M20 Loader/Robot call
M21 External Optional Block Skip On
*
0
* @
M22 External Optional Block Skip Off 0 @
M23 program start M-eade 0 0 @
M24 Chip conveyor run 0 0 @
M25 Chip conveyor stop 0 0 @
M26
M27
APPENDIX I 219
M28 Polygon mode On
M29 Rigid tapping mode On
*
0
*
0
M30 Program END(reset & rewind) 0 0
M31 Left spindle interlock by-pass 0 0 @
M32
M33
M34 Left spindle C1-axis mode Off 0 0 @
M35 Left spindle C1-axis mode On 0 0 @
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
M48 Spindle override function cancel On 0 0 @
M49 Spindle override function cancel Off 0 0 @
M50 Bar feeder command1 @
M51 Bar feeder command2
* * @
M52 Auto door open
* * @
M53 Auto door close
* * @
M54 Parts count
*
0
*
0 @
M55 Repeat the program after M02 I M30 0 0 @
M56 Tool change area interlock Off 0 0 @
M57 Tool change area interlock Off cancel 0 0 @
M58
M59
M60
M61
M62
M63
220 I Part 5
M64
M65
M66 Left chuck low pressure clamp @
M67 Left chuck high pressure clamp
* * @
M68 Left chuck clamp
*
0
*
0 @
M69 Left chuck unclamp 0 0 @
M70
M76 Swing a-setter's arm up 0 0 @
M77 Swing a-setter's arm down 0 0 @
M78
M79
M80 Mirror image Off 0 0 @
M81
M82
M83 Mirror image Z-axis 0 0 @
M84 Mirror image C-axis 0 0 @
M85
M86
M87
M88
M89 Left spindle high clamp 0 0 @
M90 Left spindle unclamp 0 0 @
M91 External M-Code M91 0 0 @
M92 External M-Code M92 0 0 @
M93 External M-Code M93
M94 External M-Code M94
M98 Sub program call 0 0
M99 Program end and restart 0 0
M100
M101
M108 Right spindle T.S.C Coolant On @
M109 Right spindle T.S.C Coolant Off
* * @
M110 Interference Check Off
*
0
*
0 @ K3.3
M111 Interference Check On 0 0 @
M112
M113
M114 Right spindle Air Blow On @
* *
APPENDIX I 221
M115 Right spindle Air Blow Off @
M116 Work ejector advance Command
*
0
*
0 @
M117
M118
M119 Right(Sub) Spindle Orientation 0 0 @
M131 Right(Sub) Spindle Interlock By-Pass 0 0 @

M132
M133
@ Only for
M134 Right Spindle C2-Aixs Mode Off 0 0
MS,SYType
M135 Right Spindle C2-Aixs Mode On 0 0 @ MS,SY
M136 C1 & C2 axis sync. control ON 0 0 @ MS,SY
M137 C1 & C2 axis sync. control OFF 0 0 @ MS,SY
M138 (Bed) Shower Coolant On 0 0 @
M139 (Bed) Shower Coolant Off 0 0 @
M140
M141
M142
M143
M144
M145
M146
M147
M148
M149
M150
M151
M152
M153
M154
M155
M156
222 I Part 5
M157
M158
M159 Error Detect On 0 0 @
M160 Error Detect Off 0 0 @
M161 Right spindle Winding Change Low Speed 0 0 @
M162 Right spindle Winding Change High Speed 0 0 @
M163
M164
M165
M166 Right chuck Low Clamp @
M167 Right chuck High Clamp
* * @
M168 Right chuck Clamp
*
0
*
0 @
M169 Right chuck Unclamp 0 0 @
M170
M171
M172
M173
M174
M175
M176 Spindle Rotation Convert On (Tap Mode) 0 0 @
M177 Spindle Rotation Convert Off 0 0 @
M178
M179 Upper tool measure select 0 0 @
M180 Turret C.W Rotation 0 0 @
M181 Turret C.C.W Rotation 0 0 @
M182 A-axis & Z2-axis synchronous control On 0 @
M183 A-axis & Z2-axis synchronous control Off 0 @
M184 Axis Moving Valid When Spindle Stop 0 0 @
M185 Axis Moving Invalid When Spindle Stop 0 0 @
M186 Parts Unloader Interlock On 0 0 @
M187 Parts Unloader Interlock Cancel 0 0 @
M188
M189 Right Spindle (C2-Axis) High Clamp 0 0 @
M190 Right Spindle (C2-Axis) Unclamp 0 0 @
M191
M192 Simul. Feedrate On(Balance Cutting) 0 0 @
M193 Simul. Feedrate Off(Balance Cutting) 0 0 @
APPENDIX I 223
M194 A-Axis Interlock Ignore 0 0 @
M195 A-Axis Interlock Ignore Cancel 0 0 @
M196
M197
M198
M199
M200 Tool Load Monitor Off 0 0 @
M201 Tool Load Monitor On 0 0 @
M202
Synchronizing speed for spindle C.W
M203 0 0 @
rotation
Synchronizing speed for spindle C.C.W
M204 0 0 @
rotation
M205 Stop synchronous spindle 0 0 @
M206
M207
M208
M209
M210 Parts unloader Waiting at Left side loader @
M211 Left spindle coolant blower on
* * @
M212 Left spindle coolant blower off
* * @
Synchronizing phase for spindle C.W * * @
M213
rotation 0 0
Synchronizing phase for spindle C.C.W
M214 0 0 @
rotation
M215 Turret Unclamp Before T-Code Command 0 0 @
M216
M217 Z2-axis interlock Off 0 @
M218 Z2-axis interlock On 0 @
M219
M220 Wait Loader In Right Side Gantry
M221
* *
M222
M223
M224
M225
M226 Work ejector advance 0 0 @
M227 Work ejector retract 0 0 @
M228
224 I Part 5
M229
M230
M231
M232
M233
M244
M245
M246
M247
M248
M249
M250
M251
M252
M253
M254
M255
M256
M257
M258
M259
M260 Turret Index With Moving Axis 0 0 @
M261 Left Spindle Winding Change Low Speed 0 0 @
M262 Left Spindle Winding Change High Speed 0 0 @
M263
M264 Other Spindle Pulse Coder Use 0 0 @
M265 Other Spindle Pulse Coder Use Cancel 0 0 @
M266
M267
M268
M269
M270
M271
M272
M273
M274 Machine Air-Bag Function Disable @
M275 Machine Air-Bag Function Enable
* * @
* *
APPENDIX I 225
M276
M277 Chamfering On 0 0 @
M278 Chamfering Off 0 0 @
M279
M280
M288 Parts unloader down to right spindle @ TT1518
M301
* *
M302
M303 A-axis torque control function ON 0
M304 A-axis torque control function relase 0
M305 Z2-axis torque control function ON 0
M306 Z2-axis torque control function ON 0
M307
M308
M309
M310 Parts unloader Waiting at Right side loader @
M311 Right Spindle Coolant Blower On
* * @
M312 Right Spindle Coolant Blower Off
* * @
M313
* * @
M314
Spindle Stop Without
M315 0 0 @
Confirmation(LefUMa in)
M316
M317
M318
M320
M321
M322
M323
M324
M325
M326
M327
M328
M329
M330
M331
226 I Part 5
M332 Top Door Open @ Gantry
M333 Top Door Close
* * @ Gantry
M334
* *
M335
M336
M337
M338
M339
M340
-M359
Reserved (Robot System & Special
M360
Equipment Control)
* *
M361
Equipment Control)
* *
M362
Equipment Control)
* *
M363
Equipment Control)
* *
M364
Equipment Control)
M365
Equipment Control)
M366
Equipment Control)
M367
Equipment Control)
M368
Equipment Control)
M369
Equipment Control)
M370
Equipment Control)
* *
M371
Equipment Control)
* *
M372
Equipment Control)
* *
M373
Equipment Control)
* *
M374
Equipment Control)
M375
Equipment Control)
M376
Equipment Control)
M377
Equipment Control)
M378
Equipment Control)
M379
Equipment Control)
M380 Parts Unloader Stopper Return 0 0 For
APPENDIX I 227
maintenance
For
M381 Parts Unloader Stopper Advance 0 0 maintenance
For
M382 Parts Unloader Body Advance 0 0 maintenance
For
M383 Parts Unloader Body Return 0 0 maintenance
For
M384 Parts Unloader Bucket Advance 0 0 maintenance
For
M385 Parts Unloader Bucket Return 0 0 maintenance
For
M386 Parts Unloader Arm Down 0 0 maintenance
For
M387 Parts Unloader Arm Return 0 0 maintenance
M484 Z1 - Z2-axis synchronous control On 0 0 @

M485 Z1 - Z2-axis synchronous control Off 0 0 @
228 I Part 5
• MOO Program Stop,
• M01 Optional Stop
These M codes are used to check the dimensions of the machined workpiece, the tool nose,
or to remove the chips during machining.
[MOO Program Stop]
Program execution and the machine stop temporarily.
[M01 Optional Program Stop]
-When optional stop push button switch in operation panel is "ON", Program execution and
the machine stop temporarily.
-When optional stop push button switch in operation panel is "OFF", M01 command is ignored
and the program is executed continously.
Note
When the machine is temporarily stopped by MOO, press the cycle start button to finish
MOO, M01 operation and to keep executing the next block.
Depending on the Keep relay setting,it will be decided to restart spindle and coolant.
-K3.4="0"
When Automatic Operation restarts, the spindle and coolant stopped by MOO don't restart
until related command is instructed.
-K3.4="1"
When Automatic Operation restarts, the spindle and coolant stopped by MOO will restart
automatically without related command.
If MOO is commanded in Automatic Mode(MDI or MEM), Automatic operation will stop and
Cycle Start Lamp keep "ON" state. Switching to manual mode in this condition makes
whole manual opertion possible.
I &CAUTION!
After spindle stopped by MOO, Clamp/Unclamp of chuck is possible using Foot-Switch only
without mode change. If Clamp/Unclamp are impossible, check the setting state of Keep
Relay K8.3.
After the operation is stopped by MOO or M01 command, if the manual operations had to be
carried out, return the axes having been operated to the previous state before manual
operation, after that the automatic operation may be restarted.
• M02 PROGRAM END,
• M30 Program End and Rewind
By this command , Machine state changes as follows.
APPENDIX I 229
-End Program and reset CNC
In case of the M30 command, the cursor returns to the start of the program. This is called
the program rewind function.
Note
Specify the M02 or M30 command in a block without other command.
• M03 Spindle Forward Rotation
• M04 Spindle Reverse Rotation
• M05 Spindle stop

M03(M04) S**** P## ; (Accompany with S-Code and P-Code, In order to command new
speed and spindle of the control Path. P-Code must be commanded)
Example of command:
M03(M04) S**** P11 ; P11 means left spindle
M03(M04) S**** P12; P12 means upper live tool spindle
M03(M04) S**** P21 ; P21 means right spindle
M03(M04) S**** P22 ; P22 means lower live tool spindle.
M05 P## ; (Accompany with P-Code, In order to command spindle of the control Path. P-
Code must be commanded)
·Example of command:
M05 P11 ; (Main spindle stop)

M05 P12 ; (Upper live tool spindle stop)
M05 P21 ; (Right spindle stop)
M05 P22 ; (Lower live tool spindle stop)
Note
Forward direction: Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the spindle
Reverse direction : Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the
spindle
• M07 High Pressure Coolant Cooljet ON
-In Upper Path :

It is possible to operate high pressure coolant equipment of the Cooljet system. In order to
use M07, Keep relay K6.4 must be set to "1".
Keep relay K6.4 =>The Cooljet coolant pump is used(---.1), or not(---.0)
230 I Part 5
According to the Keep Relay K3.6 setting, the finishing method is different.
-K3.6 = "0" (Standard Setting)
Finished by Command Confirmation regardless of operation of actual coolant motor.
-K3.6 = "1"
If actual coolant motor operates, command M-eade will be finished.
I ihCAUTIONI
By Keep Relay K4.2, M07 and M08 are possible to do mutual switching control without
command M09.
• MOB Coolant ON,
• M09 Coolant OFF
[M08 Coolant ON]

This command starts up the coolant motor, and coolant will be discharged.
[M09 Coolant OFF]
This command stops the coolant motor, and no coolant will be discharged.
Note
1.0perate coolant motor by Coolant ON push button switch in Operation panel
-When Coolant OFF switch is pressed, coolant is impossible to work automatically.
2.Finish condition.
Completion is differ by keep relay setting as follows
-K3.6 = "0" (Standard setting)
Finished by command confirm regardless of operation of actual coolant pump motor.
-K3.6="1"
If actual coolant motor do operate. command M-eade will be finished.
Operation State by Door.
Coolant does work only if Splash Guard, Shutter Door is closed state.
-K3.7 = "1"
Coolant does work regardless of the state of Splash Guard, Shutter Door.
I ihCAUTION I
By Keep Relay K4.2, M07 and M08 are possible to do mutual switching control without
command M09.
• M10 Parts catcher(A) or Parts unloader advance.
PUMA TT1500/1800 series
APPENDIX I 231
Command M1 0 makes Parts catcher(A) advance to get the parts. (Executing M1 0, then Parts
catcher(A) will finish its M-eade after the setting time that is set in variable timer 16(T30)).
Parts catcher( A) can be operated when the keep relay K8.5 is set to 1 II II.
PUMA TT2000/2500 Series

Parts unloader advances to receive the workpiece by commanding M10 on TT2000/2500.
(After executing M 10, Parts unloader will finish M-eade after the setting time that is set in
variable timer TM138 elapsed.)
11 11
Parts unloader(B) is available when the Keep Relay K8.6 is set to 1 •
I &CAUTION!
Command to operate parts unloader is different between TT1500/1800 and TT2000/2500.
TT 2000/2500 have same operating with MX machine, TT1500/1800 have a unique command.
• M11 Parts catcher(A) or Parts Unloader Retract

Command M11 makes Parts catcher(A) retract.
In case the parts catcher(A) is advanced (position to get the parts), M11 command make parts
catcher(A) retract.

In case the parts unloader is advanced (position to get the parts), M11 command make parts
unloader(B) retract order by Arm ____, Bucket ____, Body ____, Stopper. Part conveyor would be
operated until variable timer 18(T34) setting value.
· Function complete
If parts catcher or parts unloader is located in Home position. command M-eade will be
finished.
• M12 Parts Unloader Retract for TT1500/1800

Command M12 makes Parts unloader retract only for TT1500/1800 seires.
In case the parts unloader is advanced (position to get the parts), M12 command make parts
unloader(B) retract order by Bucket ____, Arm ____, Body. Part conveyor would be operated until
variable timer 18(T34) setting value.
• M14 Air Blow On for left spindle.
• M15 Ari Blow Stop for Left Spindle
232 I Part 5
[M14 Air blow ON for left spindle]
This command starts blowing air from the air blowing unit for left spindle.
[M15 Air blow OFF for left spindle]
This command stops blowing air from the air blowing unit for left spidle.
Note
According to the Keep Relay Setting, there are two ways of finish.
M-eade will be completed after confirming the operation state of Air Blow Solenoid
-K8.2="1"
Spindle will rotate at the speed set in PMC parameter during setting time, and Air Blow
does work. After these, Air Blow and M-eade will be finished.
TM32 (Operation Time)= 3000 msec (Standard Setting)

0410 (Spindle rpm)= 164(TT1800) /137 (TT1500/2000/2500) (Standard Setting)
Air Blow is possible to do work by command M14. However, if Keep Relay K8.2 is set in
"1", Air Blow will start to work with left spindle rotation. At this time, variable timer 32(TM28)
decides operation time.
Spindle Rotation r.p.m. is possible to be set in PMC Parameter 0410.
• M17 Machine Lock Act,
• M18 Machine Lock Cancel.
[M17 Machine Lock Function ON]

This command make the machine into Machine Lock State.
[M18 Machine Lock Function OFF]
This command will cancel the M17.
Note
Operation is different according to the keep relay setting.
-K2.0 = "0" (Standard setting)
Apply this command to Machine Lock Function. M,S,T functions are valid.
-K2.0="1"
Machine Lock will work, when auxiliary function M,S,T code is commanded in MEM mode.
It does not work when command is instructed.
APPENDIX I 233
I ffiCAUTIONI
1.1t is possible to command in MDI mode only. If not, commanding M17 or M18 will make
alarm No.2030 occur.
2.When Keep Relay K2.0 is set to "1", it does work as Auxiliary Machine Lock in MEM Mode.
M,S,T and G-Code do not work under auxiliary machine lock state, every work is impossible.
2.When alarm 2031 occurs. in order to release this alarm, return to reference position in
manual and it makes automatic operation possible.
(However, if K3.1="1", alarm does not occur and automatic operation is possible)
K3.1 = Reference position return is ignored after executing Machine lock(---> 1), or not( --->0)
• M19 Left Spindle Orientation
According to the kinds of orientation, command way is different.

-Orientation "A" (K8.1 = "0", N0.3702#2 = "0")
M19;
-Orientation "B" (K8.1 = "1", N0.3702#2 = "1")
M19 Sxxxx; (Command the value of "Command Angle x 10" as angle data)
• Function
According to the kinds of orientation, function is different.
-Orientation "A" (K8.1 = "0", N0.3702#2 = "0")
Spindle stops in specific position that is defined by parameter.
-Orientation "B" (K8.1 = "1", N0.3702#2 = "1")
Spindle stops in commanded position that is ordered by S-code.
• Condition of Command
Command without releasing G96 (Constant surface control function), M29(Rigid Tapping
Mode) makes alarm 2145 occur and orientation can not be executed.
• M20 Loader or Robot Call
Call Gantry-Loader or Robot Operation.

M-eade will be finished by completion signal of Gantry-Loader or Robot.
• M21 External Optional Block Skip ON,
234 I Part 5
• M22 External Optional Block Skip OFF
[M21 External Optional Block Skip ON]

This command makes the Optional Block Skp Button on the operation panel invalid, and use
the Barfeeder signals with optional block skip signal.
[M22 External Optional Block Skip OFF]
This command cancels the M21, it make the optional block skip button on the operation panel
instead of bar feeder signal valid ..
I LhCAUTION I
1. Please command the M21 in two blocks before the machining program call block,
Example)
M21 ;
/M98 P7000;
M22;
2. If M21 is commanded in just prior to M-eade of Sub Program call, malfunction will arise.
• M23 Program Start M-code
When machining program is resumed, after automatic operation stops temporarily.

It is necessary to check first executing block of the program to prevent crash the machine in
case of resuming from arbitrary block in the program. M23 command checks first executing
block of the program.
Operation is available according to the Keep Relay setting as below.
K1.5= "0" (standard setting) => M23 FUNCTION is used(~ 1) or not( ~o)
If program is executed from arbitrary block in the program, the Alarm No 2043(Program start
check alarm) is occurred.
Example)
00035 (********) ; (Program No.)
M23 ; (M23 Command shoule be written in first block of the program)
• M24 Chip Conveyor Run,
• M25 Chip Conveyor Stop

These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the chip conveyor.
[M24 Chip conveyor run]
Chip conveyor does work in the C.W direction.
[M25 Chip conveyor Stop]
Chip conveyor stop.
APPENDIX I 235
Note
According to the keep relay setting as follows, completion is different.
-K1.7="0" (Standard setting)
After commanding, conveyor will do work and M-eade will be finished.
-K1.7="1"
After commanding, chip conveyor does work during the time set in PMC parameter, and
then conveyor and M-Code will be finished simultaneously.
TM5(Chip conveyor working time)="O" When shipped, Customer can be set its value.
• M28 POLYGON MODE ON
• Function
It can be used in machining of polygonal bolts by constant ratio rotation of left(right) spindle
and milling tool spindle.
More details can be referred in Polygon Function Manual.
• Condition of Command
Above function can be used in machining of polygonal bolts by constant ratio rotation of left
spindle and milling tool spindle. It isn't proper in precision machining.
More details can be referred in Polygon Function Manual.
• M29 RIGID TAPPING ON
M29 S**** P## ;

(Accompany with S-Code and P-Code, In order to command new speed and spindle of the
control Path. P-Code must be commanded)
Rigid tapping mode, after executing G84 or G88, will be released by G80 or CNC reset.
The spindle must be commanded after changing into relevant spindle which is about to do
rigid tapping, and it must be commanded in G97 mode (releasing constant surface control
cancel), G98 (feed per minute mode). If M29 is commanded in G96 (constant surface control
mode), Alarm2367(RIGID TAP & ORIENTATION COMMAND ERROR IN G96 MODE will
occur.
For more details, refer to Programming manual for Rigid Tapping Cycle.
236 I Part 5
• M30 Program End & Rewind
• Command
Sole command in a block. Generally M30 is used in the end of the program.
• Function
Program will finish, CNC becomes reset state and cursor will move to the top of program. It
will be OFF when executing Automatic Operation or when manual mode changes into another
mode. M30 makes program stop and CNC reset.
And cursor move to the top of executing block without any other code.
• M31 Interlock By-Pass (Left chuck & left spindle rotation)
M31 allows spindle to rotate and cycle start to valid under the state of left chuck undamped.
And it allows chuck clamp command and unclamp command to valid during the rotation of left
spindle. In case of clamping chuck after commanding M31, "INTERLOCK BY-PASS" will be
released.
• M34 C-axis mode OFF,
• M35 C-axis mode ON
[M34 C-axis mode OFF]

This function can be used as the method to change C-axis (Cs contouring mode) to spindle
status. (Spindle speed control mode).
According to the command of the control Path, function is different as below.
-In the PATH1 : C1-axis (left spindle) will be changed to spindle speed control mode.
-In the PATH2 : C1-axis (left spindle) will be changed to spindle speed control mode. After
C1-axis composition control is canceled.
Note
Spindle must be stopped before commanding M34. When M34 commands from upper path
during machining with C1-axis in lower path, Alarm2130 will be occurred.
[M35 C-axis mode ON]

This function can be used as the method to change spindle status(Spindle speed control
mode) to C-axis (Cs contouring mode).
-In the PATH1 :Spindle will be changed speed control mode to C1-axis mode.
-In the PATH2: Spindle will be changed speed control mode to C1-axis mode and C1-axis
composition control mode is activated automatically. (C1-axis can be controlLED on lower
path)
• M48 Override Cancel
APPENDIX I 237
• M49 Override Cancel Release
[M48 Override Cancel ON]
Feed rate override is fixed as 100%. In case that spindle does tapping cycle, not using rigid
tapping function. M48 written in the top of program enables to ignore feed hold or single block
alarm and keep executing the program.
Command example) 0001

M48;
M03 S*** P12 ;
G01W_F_,
M05P12;
M04 S*** P12 ;
G01-W_F_ _ ,
M49;
[M49 Override Cancel OFF]

M49 enables to use feed override which are fixed by M48.
• M50 Bar-Feeder Command 1 (Only valid on upper)
Supply workpiece to machine where bar-feeder is installed.

According to the keep relay setting as follows, function is different
K6.5=1 : (Standard setting) : Bar feeder will push the bar
K6.5=0 : Bar feeder will push by auto mode signal.
• M51 Bar-Feeder Command 2 (Only valid on uppper)

Bar feeder will load new bar after Bar-End signal turned "ON"
• M52 Auto Door Open
• M53 Auto door close

M52 command opens splash guard door automatically in the machine which auto splash
guard door is installed.
M53 command closes splash guard door automatically in the machine which auto splash
guard door is installed.
238 I Part 5
• M54 Parts Count
Count the quantity of workpiece that has finished machining and display the quantity in
Screen.
In case that parameter is set as follows, the count is valid by M54 and the count is also valid
by M02/M30, use only one command in counting.
No.6710 ="54"
No.6711= Increasing by 1 when M54 being executed.
No.6712= Increasing by 1 when M54 being executed.
N0.6713= request quantity (request number of workpiece)
If the counted quantity reached request quantity, alarm 2108 will occur and program stops.
• M55 Program Restart

Automatic re-cycle start can be used to restart the automatic operation without operating of
the Cycle start switch after completion of the machining program by M02 or M30.That is, when
commanding the M55 just before M02 or M30 block, the program is finished once and restarts
from the top of program. In addition, this loop is executed repeatedly.
Automatic re-cycle start is used mainly in case that M02 or M30 is absolutely needed when
using the following functions.
-Tool life management
-Tool load monitoring.
Program example)
00001 ;
G28 UO.VO.WO.;
; (The part of machining program)
M55 ; (Automatic re-cycle start command)
M30 ; (Program)
(After completing M30, the machining program will restart automatically from the top of the
program)
• M56 Tool Chagne Interlock OFF,
• M57 Tool Change Interlock OFF Cancel.
M56 enables the tool change at any position of X andY-axis.

M57 enables the tool change at the reference point of X andY-axis.
APPENDIX I 239
• M66 Low Pressure for Chucking,
• M67 High Pressure for Chucking
[M66: low pressure for chucking]

Change chucking pressure into low pressure. (After commanding, chucking LED is blink in
clamp state)
[M67 : high pressure for chucking]
Change chucking pressure into high pressure. (After commanding, chucking LED is turned
ON in clamp state)
·Completion of Command
After commanding M66, M-eade will be finished after preset time set in PMC parameter.
TM31 (High Pressure I Low Pressure changing time)= 3000 msec (Standard Setting)
·Condition of Command
After commanding M66 or M67, once unclamp chuck and then clamp. By this way, chucking
pressure is changed normally.
When commanding M66 or M67, with change in chucking state, Keep Relay K0.5 should be
set.
• M68 Left Chuck Clamp,
• M69 Left Chuck Unclamp Command.
[M68 : left chuck clamp]

Clamp left chuck.
[M69 : left chuck unclamp]
Unclamp left chuck.
With Keep Relay setting, completion treatment of M-eade is different.

K7.6 = "1"
Without using a proximity switch for check the chucking state, after time set in timer as
follows, the function will be completed by solenoid output.
TM30 (Chucking operation time)= 2000 msec (Standard Setting)
TM40 (Unclamp operation time)= 2000 msec (Standard Setting)
K7.6 = "0"
With using a proximity switch for check the chucking state, after time set in timer as follows,
the function will be completed by solenoid output.
· Condition of Command
Command is impossible during rotating of spindle. According to chucking mode, the
240 I Part 5
direction of chuck jaw is different.
• M76 Q-Setter Down,
• M77 Q-Setter Up
[M76 Q-setter down]

Down the Q-Setter.
[M77 Q-setter up]
Up the Q-Setter.
Q-Setter doesn't go down in some case as follows.
-Spindle is rotating.
- Entered into conveyor range.
- X1, Z1, X2 and Z2-axis do not in the reference point.
Q-Setter is possible to use when Keep Relay is set to K7.5 = "1".
• M80 Mirror Image Off,
• M83 Mirror Image for Z-axis ON,
• M84 Mirror Image for C-axis
[M80 Mirror Image OFF]

Release the Mirror image function. For more information about this function, refer to NC
operation manual.
[M83 Mirror Image for Z-axis ON, M84 Mirror Image for C-axis ON]
Enable the Mirror image function for selected axis. For more information about this function,
refer to NC operation manual.
• M86 Torque Limit Skip ON (Only Valid on Lower)
APPENDIX I 241
• M87 Torque Limit Skip Cancel (Only Valid on Lower)
[M86 Torque limit skip ON]

This command can be used to activate torque skip function.
[M87 Torque limit skip Cancel]
This command can be used to cancel torque skip function.
• Function
This command can be used to skip by load capacity of servo motor at the time of axis
moving. M86 is valid until M87 is commanded or Reset button is pressed in MDI Panel,
After M86 is commanded, feeding should be executed by G01. If feeding is done in Rapid
moving, CNC alarm occurs.
Programming example)
GOO A-500.0 ;
M86;
G98 G31 P98A-600.0 F100.0;
G01 A-500.0 ;
Note)
P98 : Skip when a torque limit is reached
P99 : Skip when a torque limit is reached or the SKIP PMC Input signal is sent
I &CAUTION!
Set the torque skip value in PMC parameter D472.

When skip signal is used in Measuring device, Don't use P99 code.
• M89 Left Spindle (C1-axis) High Clamp
242 I Part 5
• M90 Left Spindle (C1-axis) Unclamp
[M89 Left spindle(C-axis) high clamp ON]

Clamp C1-axis with high pressure.
[M90 Left spindle(C-axis) high clamp ON]
Unclamp C1-axis.
·Completion of Command (M89)
After commanding , solenoid will be turned ON after the time passed, which is set in TM35.
After solenoid turns "ON", it will be finished after the time passed which is set in TM36. and
then C1-Axis servo will be off after the time passed which is et in TM34.
Note
Command is valid when C1-Axis is selected by M35. If this command is used with C-axis
feed in same block, it will work after axis feed is finished. In the clamp state with high
pressure, manual reference position return and jog feeding of C1-Axis is impossible. When
command is done as C1-axis is gripped with high pressure, C1-axis cannot be movable.
However, tapping cycle can be used in clamp state with high pressure.
· Completion of Command (M90)
After commanding, it will be finished after the time passed which is set in TM36.
Note
Command(M90) is valid when C1-Axis is selected by M35.
According to below Keep relay setting, C1-axis is undamped automatically.
K11.1 = "0" : When the C-axis is undamped automatically by Reset button (---> 0), or not(-> 1)
• M91 Spare External M-code
• M92 Spare External M-code

M-code is reserved. Output port is reserved.
· Completion of Command
M91, M92 have different FIN treatment with Keep Relay Setting as follows.
-K10.4="1"
When commanding M91, if output by M92 becomes "OFF" and output by M91 becomes
"ON", M-code is completed.
When commanding M92, if output by M91 becomes "OFF" and output by M92 becomes
"ON", M-code is completed.
- K10.4 = "0"
When commanding M91, if a corresponding output becomes "ON" and corresponding input
is responded, M-code is completed.
When commanding M92, if a corresponding output becomes "ON" and corresponding input
is responded, M-code is completed.
APPENDIX I 243
• M98 Sub Program Call
Call a sub program.

M98 Pxxxx ; (Pxxxx means the number of sub program which will be called)
• M99 Program End and Restart
Used in the last part of program to start the program from the first automatically.
Used in the last of the sub program to return to the main program.
• M108 Coolant ON for right T.S.C,
• M109 Coolant OFF for right T.S.C
[M1 08 Coolant ON for right T.S.C]

M108 enables to operate Through right Spindle Coolant.
[M1 09 Coolant OFF for right T.S.C]
M 109 enables to stop Through right Spindle Coolant.
• M11 0 Interference Check OFF,
• M111 Interference Check ON
[M11 0 interference check off]

Release the function which checks the interference on each feeding axes. To avoid collision,
The Rotary area interference check function is used. This M-eade can be used to make axis
move within the interference area.
[M111 interference check ON]
Cancel the function of interference check release.
• M114 Right Spindle Air Blow ON,
244 I Part 5
• M115 Right Spindle Air Blow OFF
[M114 Air blow ON for right spindle]

This command starts blowing air from the air blowing unit for right spindle.
[M115 Air blow OFF for right spindle]
This command stops blowing air from the air blowing unit for right spidle.
Note
According to the Keep Relay Setting, there are two ways of finish.
M-eade will be completed after confirming the operation state of Air Blow Solenoid
-K8.2="1"
Spindle will rotate at the speed set in PMC parameter during setting time, and Air Blow
does work. After these, Air Blow and M-eade will be finished.
TM132 (Operation Time)= 3000 msec (Standard Setting)
0440 (Spindle rpm)= 136(Standard Setting)
• M116 Work Ejection
M116 enables to operate work ejector. This command is valid only when right chuck is
undamped. And it will retract automatically after forwarding confirm switch is "ON" in ejector
bar. If M-eade isn't finished in 15sec, alarm occurs.
•M119 Right Spindle Orientation
According to the kinds of orientation, command way is different.

- Orientation "A" (K8.1 = "0", N0.3702#2 = "0")
M119;
-Orientation "B" (K8.1 = "1", N0.3702#2 = "1")
M119 Sxxxx; (Command the value of "Command Angle x 10" as angle data)
·Function
According to the kinds of orientation, function is different.

-Orientation "A" (K8.1 = "0", N0.3702#2 = "0")
Spindle stops in specific position that is defined by parameter.
-Orientation "B" (K8.1 = "1", N0.3702#2 = "1")
Spindle stops in commanded position that is ordered by S-code.
• M128 Coolant ON for left T.S.C,
• M129 Coolant OFF for left T.S.C
[M128 Coolant ON for left T.S.C]

M128 enables to operate left Through Spindle Coolant.
[M129 Coolant OFF for left T.S.C]
APPENDIX I 245
M129 enables to stop left Through Spindle Coolant.
• M131 INTERLOCK BY-PASS (RIGHT CHUCK CLAMP & RIGHT SPINDLE ROTATION)
M 131 enables to command the spindle rotating and cycle start when the right chuck is
undamped. It enables to command the chuck clamp & unclamp during the right spindle is
rotating. In case clamping the chuck after command M131, "Interlock by-pass" will be
released.
•M134 C-axis mode OFF
• M135 C-axis mode ON
[M134 C2-axis mode OFF]

This function can be used as the method to change C2-axis (Cs contouring mode) to right
spindle status. (Spindle speed control mode)
-In the PATH2: C2-axis (right spindle) will be changed to spindle speed control mode.
- In the PATH1 : C2-axis (right spindle) will be changed to spindle speed control mode.
After C2-axis composition control is canceled.
Note
Spindle must be stopped before commanding M34. When M134 commands from lower
path during machining with C2-axis in upper path, Alarm2130 will be occurred.
[M 135 C2-axis mode ON]

This function can be used as the method to change spindle status(Spindle speed control
ode) to C2-axis (Cs contouring mode).
- In the PATH2 : right spindle will be changed speed control mode to C2-axis mode.
- In the PATH1 : right spindle will be changed speed control mode to C2-axis mode and
C2-axis composition control mode is activated automatically. (C2-axis can be controlLED
on upper path)
• M136 C1-C2 synchronous control ON
246 I Part 5
• M137 C1-C2 synchronous control OFF
[M 136 C 1 and C2 synchronous control ON]

Starts the C-Axis synchronous control between C1-axis and C2-axis.
[M137 C1 and C2 synchronous control OFF]
Release synchronous control of C1-axis and C2-axis.
Note
It is possible to use that C1-axis and C2-axis rotate in synchronized same feed speed by
M136. In order to use this function, C1-Axis and C2-Axis must be returned in their origin
position, and both chuck must be clamped before command (Alarm No.2141 ). If this
command is commanded in spindle speed control mode, Alarm No.2141 occurs. If M136 is
commanded in the PATH1, C1 axis is to be Master and C2 axis is to be slave axis of C1. If
GO C60. is commanded after M136 in the PATH1, C1 axis rotate as much as C60 at that
time C2 rotates same phase and same speed with C1. After command M137, M136 is
canceled.
If C2 axis is to be commanded in upper turret after M137, the return to reference position
of C2 axis is to be commanded before commanding a cutting program.
Program example)
M136; Starts the C-Axis synchronous control between Upper path and Lower path
M137; The synchronous control mode is cancelled.
Note)
This function is only for two turret machine. (TT-Series, MX-ST Type Only) To use this
function, below parameters should be set in both path. Parameter N4002 S1 #4=0 (Must
be checked in Upper path and Lower path ) Parameter N8180 C=3 (Must be checked in
Upper path and Lower path )
• M138 Bed Shower Coolant ON
• M139 Bed Shower Coolant OFF
[M 138 bed shower coolant ON]

Discharge the Bed shower coolant.
[M 139 bed shower coolant OFF]
Stop the bed shower coolant.
Without this command, the coolant can be operated automatically, when machining program
is executed in MEM mode
APPENDIX I 24 7
• M159 Error Detect ON
• M160 Error Detect OFF
[M159 Error Detect ON]

When two blocks in program are cutting feed, Generally second block start its cutting feed
before the first block doesn't finish its acceleration/deceleration completely. At this time, round
shape occurs. If Error detect function us used, next block start to feed after the first block
finishes its acceleration/deceleration completely. This reduces round phenomenon. If M159 is
commanded and cutting feed is executed continuously, deceleration of feeding axis servo motor
in each block is completely finished and then next command is executed, That is, above
command enables to reduce the round which occurs in the edge of workpiece.
[M160 Error Detect OFF]
Cancel the Error detection function by M159.
• M161 Right Spindle Winding Change Low Speed,
• M162 Right Spindle Winding Change High Speed.
[M161 right spindle winding change low speed]

Executing winding switching to low speed winding status in RH-spindle speed control mode.
[M162 right spindle winding change high speed]
Executing winding switching to high speed winding status in RH-spindle speed control mode.
Note
1. Winding switching command can not be operated in some case as follows ;
-Orientation command is executing or has been completed.
- Spindle Synchronous control command is executing
- RH spindle has been changed to C2-axis status
2. When C2-Axis is selected by Push button or M135 Command, spindle winding will be
changed to Low winding status automatically.
3. When C2-Axis is changed into spindle speed control mode, Please command this M-
code(M162) after M134 is commanded.
• M166 Dual Chucking Low Pressure of right chuck,
248 I Part 5
• M167 Dual Chucking High Pressure of right chuck
[M166: dual chucking low pressure of right chuck]

Change chucking pressure into low pressure. (After commanding, chucking LED is blink in
clamp state)
[M167: dual chucking high pressure of right chuck]
Change chucking pressure into high pressure. (After commanding, chucking LED is turned
ON in clamp state)
· Completion of Command
After commanding M166, M-code will be finished after preset time set in PMC parameter.
TM 131 (High Pressure I Low Pressure changing time) = 3000 msec (Standard Setting)
After commanding M166 or M167, once unclamp chuck and then clamp. By this way, chucking
pressure is changed normally.
When commanding M166 or M167, with change in chucking state, Keep Relay K0.5 should be
set.
• M168 Right Chuck Clamp,
• M169 Right Chuck Unclamp
[M 168 : right chuck clamp]

Clamp right chuck.
[M169: right chuck unclamp]
Unclamp right chuck.
With Keep Relay setting, completion treatment of M-eade is different.

- K7.7 = "1"
Without using a proximity switch for check the chucking state, after time set in timer as
follows, the function will be completed by solenoid output.
- K7.7 = "0"
With using a proximity switch for check the chucking state, after time set in timer as follows,
the function will be completed by solenoid output.
Condition of Command
Command is impossible during rotating of spindle. According to chucking mode, the

direction of chuck jaw is different.
APPENDIX I 249
• M176 Spindle Rotation Direction Reverse,
• M177 Spindle Rotation Direction Reverse Cancel.
[M176 Spindle Rotation Convert ON]

With M-eade command, change the rotating direction into opposite direction. And it is used to
make left-handed thread in rigid tapping. (Before rotating command for spindle, if M03 is
commanded after M176 command then spindle rotates in CCW. If M04 is commanded after
M176 command, then spindle rotates in CW).
[M177 Spindle Rotation Convert OFF]
Change the direction that is reversed by M176 command into normal direction. Cancel the
change of rotating direction by M 176.
• M180 Turret C.W Rotation,
• M181 Turret C.C.W Rotation
When tool index is progress in automatic mode, it will rotate in the direction of short distance.
But when these M-codes are commanded, it will rotate in the direction of CW or CCW.
[M180 turret CW rotation]
Rotate turret in the direction of CW.
Rotate turret in the direction of CCW.
Note
These M-codes are used as sole command before commanding T-code. In addition, it can
be used in the same block with T-code. It is one-shot M-eade. Once tool index is done, the
method of the next tool index returned its original way of short distance direction.
• M182 A-Z2 Axis Synchronous control ON
250 I Part 5
• M183 A-Z2 Axis Synchronous control OFF
[M182 A-Z2 axis synchronous control ON]

Make synchronize the A-axis and Z2-axis
[M183 A-Z2 axis synchronous control OFF]
Release synchronize between A-axis and Z2-axis
[M203(M204) Spindle Forward(Reverse) Speed Synchronous Command]
These commands are used to synchronize the spindle speed of both spindles. These
commands are used to transfer a workpiece having round section. To shorten the cycle time, it is
recommended to use these M-eade instead of M213(M214) if the workpiece has round section.
When tool index is progress in automatic mode, it will rotate in the direction of short distance.
But when these M-codes are commanded, it will rotate in the direction of CW or CCW.
Rotate turret in the direction of CW.
Rotate turret in the direction of CCW.
Note
These M-codes are used as sole command before commanding T-code. In addition, it can
be used in the same block with T-code. It is one-shot M-eade. Once tool index is done, the
method of the next tool index returned its original way of short distance direction.
• M184 Axis Moving Valid When Spindle Stop.
• M185 Axis Moving Invalid When Spindle Stop.
[M184 axis moving valid when spindle stop]

Axis can be move when spindle stop.
[M185 axis moving invalid when spindle stop]
Axis cannot be move when spindle stop.
According to below Keep relay setting, axis moving condition is different
- K12.3
When spindle is stop, axis can move after M184 command(---> 1), or not(-> 0)
• M186 Part Unloader Interlock OFF,
• M187 Part Unloader Interlock ON
[M186]1t is used to release the interlock between the part unloader and X1 ,X2-axis
[M 187]1t is used to execute the interlock between the part unloader and X1 ,X2-axis
• M189 Right Spindle (C2-axis) High Clamp,
APPENDIX I 251
• M190 Right Spindle (C2-axis) Unclamp
[M189 Right spindle(C-axis) high clamp ON]

Clamp C-axis with high pressure.
[M190 Right spindle(C-axis) high clamp ON]
Unclamp C-axis.
·Completion of Command (M189)
After commanding, solenoid will be turned ON after the time passed, which is set in TM135.
After solenoid turns "ON", it will be finished after the time passed which is set in TM136. and
then C2-Axis servo will be off after the time passed which is et in TM134.
Note
Command is valid when C2-Axis is selected by M135. If this command is used with C2-
axis feed in same block, it will work after axis feed is finished. In the clamp state with high
pressure, manual reference position return and jog feeding of C2-Axis is impossible. When
command is done as C-axis is gripped with high pressure, C2-axis cannot be movable.
However, tapping cycle can be used in clamp state with high pressure.
Completion of Command (M190)
After commanding, it will be finished after the time passed which is set in TM136.
Note
Command (M190) is valid when C2-Axis is selected by M135.
According to below Keep relay setting, C2-axis is undamped automatically.
K11.1 = "0" : When the C-axis is undamped automatically by Reset button (---> 0), or not(-> 1)
• M192 Synchronous Feedrate Control ON (Only valid on BALANCE CUT)
252 I Part 5
• M193 Synchronous Feedrate Control OFF (Only valid on BALANCE CUT)
[M192 synchronous feedrate control ON]

The upper path federate override switch is used to control both upper feed and lower feed.
[M192 synchronous feedrate control ON]
·Cancel the M192command.
When both sides are machined at the same time, the movement of one tool must be in
phase with that of the other tool. Otherwise, the workpiece can vibrate, resulting in poor
machining. With this function, the movement of one tool post can be easily synchronized
with that of the other tool post.
When G68 is specified in the programs for both tool post 1 and tool post 2, the pulse
distribution of tool post 1 is synchronized with that of tool post 2 to start balance cutting.
Thus the two tool posts can move exactly at the same time to allow balance cutting.
Program example)
Upper Path Lower Path
M910(Waiting M-eade) M91 O(Waiting M-eade)

G50 81500 GOO X195.0 Z2.0
G96 M03 8300 P11
GOO X195.0 Z2.0 M911(Waiting M-eade)
M911(Waiting M-eade) G68
M192 G01 Z-50.0 F0.3
G68 X200.0
r,n1 7-t:in n Fn 1 II? n \1\/1 n
M192 is commanded in first block of G68(balance cutting), and M193 is commanded in the
next block of G69(balance cutting cancel).
Example)
00001 (UPPER); 00001 (UPPER);
M192;
G68; (Balance cutting mode on) G68; (Balance cutting mode on)
G69; (Balance cutting mode cancel) G69; (Balance cutting mode cancel)
M193;
If M192 is commanded in Upper path Program, Lower path axes are controlled by Upper
path feedrate override switch.
• M194 A-axis Interlock Release
APPENDIX I 253
• M195 A-axis Interlock ON
[M194 A-axis interlock Release]

Release the interlock to enable the A-axis's moving even if the X1, Y, X2-axis is in the
reference point.
[M195 A-axis interlock ON]
Cancel the M194 command.
• M200 Tool Load Monitor OFF
• M201 Tool Load Monitor ON
[M200 tool load monitor OFF]

This M-Cdoe can be disabled the function of Tool load monitor during executing program.
[M201 tool load monitor ON]
This M-Cdoe can be enabled the function of Tool load monitor during executing program.
• M203 Speed Synchronous Forward Command
• M204 Speed Synchronous Reverse Command
• M205 Synchronous Stop
• M211 Left Coolant Blow ON
• M212 Left Coolant Blow OFF
[M211 Left Spindle Coolant Blower ON]

Left coolant blow is turned on
[M212 Left Spindle Coolant Blower OFF]
It stops the operation of coolant blow.
• M213 Speed & Phase Synchronous Forward Command
• M214 Speed & Synchronous Reverse Command
To transfer a workpiece from main spindle to sub spidle with both spindles rotating,
synchronize the spindle speed and pahse of both spindles or just the spindle speed by
specifiying synchronization operation.
[M203(M204) Spindle Forward(Reverse) Speed Synchronous Command]

These commands are used to synchronize the spindle speed of both spindles. These
commands are used to transfer a workpiece having round section. To shorten the cycle time,
it is recommended to use these M-code instead of M213(M214) if the workpiece has round
section.
M203(M204) S**** P 11 ;
254 I Part 5
[M213(M214) Spindle Forward(Reverse) Phase Synchronous Command]

These commands are used to synchronize the spindle speed and phase of both spindles.
M213(M214) S**** P11 ;
[M205 Spindle Synchronous Stop Command]
This command is used to stop the main spindle and sub spindle with same spee and phase.
This is, cancel the synchronous control operation.
• M215 TURRET UNCLAMP
Unclamp the turret before tool change command.

It is available in Auto mode. If the mode is changed into Manual mode or the door opens, the
turret will be clamped.
If the feeding is executed during the turret unclamping, cycle stop alarm occurs and the turret
will be clamped.
• M217 Z2-axis Interlock Release (Only valid on LOWER}
• M218 Z2- axis Interlock Release (Only valid on LOWER}
[M217 Z2-axis interlock Release]

Release the interlock to enable the Z2-axis's moving even if the A -axis is not in the reference
point.
[M218 Z2-axis interlock ON]
Z2-axis cannot be fed when A-axis isn't in the reference point.
• M220 Loader or Robot Call
Call Gantry-Loader or Robot Operation in Path2.

M-eade will be finished by completion signal of Gantry-Loader or Robot.
• M226 Work Ejector Advance
• M227 Work Ejector Retract
[M226 Work Ejector Advance]

M226 enables to operate work ejector to forward position. This command is valid only when
right spindle is undamped. Command the M226 when exchanging the ejector pin.
[M227 Work Ejector Retract]
M227 enables to operate work ejector to backward position. This command is valid only when
APPENDIX I 255
right spindle is undamped.
• M260 Tool Index and Axis Moving
Control the timing of tool index when T-code & axis moving command are used in same block.
-In case that M60 isn't used before commanding T-code
Tool index after finishing axis moving
-When M60 is used before commanding T-code
If axis moving is done in -direction, tool index with axis moving. However, Z-axis moving
command is instructed with X-axis moving command at the same time, tool index after axis
moving.
• M261 Left Spindle Winding Change Low Speed,
• M262 Left Spindle Winding Change High Speed.
[M261 left spindle winding change low speed]

Executing winding switching to low speed winding status in LH-spindle speed control mode.
[M262 left spindle winding change high speed]
Executing winding switching to high speed winding status in LH-spindle speed control mode.
Note
1. Winding switching command can not be operated in some case as follows ;
-Orientation command is executing or has been completed.
- Spindle Synchronous control command is executing
- LH spindle has been changed to C1-axis status
2. When C1-Axis is selected by Push button or M35 Command, spindle winding will be
changed to Low winding status automatically.
3. When C1-Axis is changed into spindle speed control mode, Please command this M-
code(M262) after M34 is commanded.
• M264 Right Spindle Postion Coder Use (in upper path)
• M264 Left Spindle Postion Coder Use (in lower path)
This function is used to receive the spindle position coder feedback signal of another system.
When the machining is executed by G99 (Feeding per rotation) in upper unit with lower unit, if
M264 is commanded in lower unit, the position coder feedback signal of left spindle is
distributed into upper and lower unit at the same time.
The operation of lower unit is same.
• M265 Left Spindle Postion Coder Use (in upper path)
• M265 Right Spindle Postion Coder Use (in lower path)
Cancel the M264 command, Receive the spindle position coder feedback signal of its own
256 I Part 5
system.
• M274 Machine Air-Bag Function Disable
• M275 Machine Air-Bag Function Enable
Machine coolision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load torque on the servo
motor compared with normal rapid traverse or cutting feed. This function(Machine Air-Bag
• Function
has a advantage of minimizing danage to the mahchine. When it is occurred collision situation,
the carriage directly move reverse direction a little. The collision sensing is gained from
disturbance of torque on the servo motors.
When machine air-bag have been detected large torque form the abnormal status,
Alarm No.2081 occurs.
[M274 Machine Air-Bag Function Disable]
This M-code can be ignored Machine air-bag function.
[M275 Machine Air-Bag Function Enable]
Machine air-bag function is enabled
Note
This airbag function is ignored as following conditions.
- M274 is commanded.
-Rigid tapping mode.
• M277 Chamfering ON
• M278 Chamfering OFF
These commands indicate whether or not chamfering is carried out in the thread cutting cycle
called by the G92 and G76 command.
[M277 Chamfering ON]
If the thread to be cut does not have a groove at the end, the chamfering ON command M277
is required.
[M278 Chamfering OFF]
If the thread to be cut has a groove at the end, specify the Chamfering OFF command M278,
chamfering is not required.
• M288 Parts unloader down to right chuck
This M ocde is only for TT1500/1800 series. (same opeating M10 in MX, TT2000/2500)
Parts unloader advances to receive the workpiece by commanding M288 on TT1500/1800.
(After executing M288, Parts unloader will finish M-code after the setting time that is set in
variable timer TM138 elapsed.)
Parts unloader(B) is available when the Keep Relay K8.6 is set to "1"
APPENDIX I 257
• M289 Left Spindle High Clamp Control
It consists of MACRO program and controls the high clamp of the left spindle.
·Command Condition
It is used to control the spindle high clamp of other system when G83, G84, G87 and G88
which control the left spindle in the lower unit during the composition control are commanded.
I&CAUTIONI
When M389 is commanded, M289 should be commanded to return the selection of spindle
control into its own system after executing of program.
• M303 A-Axis Torque Control ON (Lower)
• M304 A- Axis Torque Control Cancel (LOWER)
• M305 Z2- Axis Torque Control ON (LOWER)
• M306 Z2- Axis Torque Control Cancel (LOWER)
These M-codes are used in macro program and cannot be used in sole.
• M310 Parts Unloader Waiting at the Right side
Parts unloader advances and stand-by at the upper side (without down) (After executing
M31 0, Parts unloader will finish M-eade after the setting time that is set in variable timer
Tm18(T34) elapsed.)
Parts unloader(B) is available when the Keep Relay K8.6 is set to "1".
Note
TT1500/1800
- Parts unloader advances to receive the workpiece by commanding M288.
-Parts unloader retract to home position by commanding M12.
TT2000/2500
-Parts unloader advances to receive the workpiece by commanding M10.
-Parts unloader retract to home position by commanding M11.
• M311 Right Coolant Blow ON
• M312 Right Coolant Blow OFF
[M211 Left Spindle Coolant Blower ON]

Right coolant blow is turned on
[M212 Left Spindle Coolant Blower OFF]
It stops the operation of coolant blow.
258 I Part 5
• M315 Left Spindle Stop (NOT CONFIRM)
Command M315, then only the stop command is ordered to the left spindle on rotating and
execute the next block without confirming the stop completion.
• M316 Z2-axis Current Load Read 1
• M317 Z2-axis Current Load Read 2
• M326 A-axis Current Load Read 1
These M-codes are used in macro program only.
• M332 Top Door Open.
• M334 Top Door Close
These M-codes are used to open/close the top door for gantry loader system.
• M360 Reserved for Robot system.
• M379 Reserved for Robot system.
These M-codes are reserved for robot system.
•M380 Parts Unloader Stopper Retrun
• M381 Parts Unloader Stopper Advance
•M382 Parts Unloader Body Advance
•M383 Parts Unloader Body Return
•M384 Parts Unloader Bucket Advance
•M385 Parts Unloader Bucket Retrun
•M386 Parts Unloader Arm Advance
•M387 Parts Unloader Arm Return
These commands are used for maintenance of the parts unloader.
APPENDIX I 259
• M389 RIGHT SPINDLE HIGH CLAMP CONTROL
·Function
It consists of MACRO program and controls the high clamp of the right spindle.
·Command Condition
It is used to control the spindle high clamp of other system when G83, G84, G87 and G88
which control the right spindle in the upper unit during the composition control are
commanded.
I&CAUTIONI
When M389 is commanded, M289 should be commanded to return the selection of spindle
control into its own system after executing of program.
• M900~999 WAITING M-CODE
·Function
It is used when the upper and lower unit execute the program simultaneously at the same
place. Alarm will occur when the different M-eade is coincided.
The waiting M-eade used in upper or lower program executes the next block without waiting
during the program running. But the waiting code is commanded on one unit only and the
other side is in the state of cycle start when the upper and lower are selected simultaneously,
the program cannot be run but will be the waiting state.
260 I Part 5

Operation Manual TT1800SY PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual TT1800SY PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

Introduction I Precaution I Basic Operation

Fanuc CNC System

Part 2 OPERATION ................................ 30

Part 3 PROGRAMMING ........................ 181

Part 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........ 197

Part 5 APPENDIX .................................. 219

Main MCCB handle in

Located in the front of machine

Emergency stop Switch

Turn on the power according to power ON

procedure after being fully understood the

1.2 Operation of power switches

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 001

If the door of control panel is closed and the handle position is ON

If the handle is in current position, MCCB performs the power

(2) CNC Switch

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 003

Emergency stop switch is for stopping the machine immediately

(4) RS-232C & Service plug receptacle

Each mode selection switch can be classified into 3

The functions related to the program edit determine

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 005

When pressing the MDI mode switch, LED on switch is ON and

When pressing the Reference Point Return Switch, LED on

Note) When returning to Reference point of Y axis, be sure to

When pressing the Jog Mode Switch, LED on switch is ON and

(2) Machine ready, Emergency stop release and Alarm release

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 007

(3) Automatic operation & Feed hold switch

It can be used to start the automatic operation in MEM mode

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 009

(4) Path select switch

Upper Path+ NC operation (path 1):

Lower path + NC operation (path2):

1) Jog feed switch

@ Additional right spindle machine

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 011

A-axis feed selec-

C axis feed of M type is available only if the spindle se ection is in .

Rapid speed will be set in CNC parameter for every axis.

3-step override can be selected by rapid select button on

[;] [[;] 100%

<LED state of rapid override switch>

ILED of 25% button is flickering!

Rapid override will be selected to 100%

ILED of 100% button is ON I

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 013

Using this switch, axis feed speed can be adjusted

Incremental feed LED state of switch MPG

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 015

First of all, select upper or lower ~~

select left spindle in enable mode of spindle selection switches as follows.

HANDLE AXIS SELECT

When selecting C1 selection switch, the state of left spindle will be

When selecting C2-axis selection switch, the state of right spindle

MAIN OPERATION PANEL I 017

1. In case of opening the door without releasing the door interlock.

2) Spindle stop switch

(11) Spindle override switch

40 presetting value using this switch.

(12) Tool index switch

[~] ~ [E) [!]

___ j t"'-21<N )'.